02 Specifications

Aramco Overseas Company
King Abdullah Sports City

Multi-Purpose Sports Hall & Athletics Stadium

051200 Structural Steel Framing Specification
KASC-SA-SPH-SPC-2913
0 | 20-April 2013


20/04/2013
Section 051200 / 1 Structural Steel Framing

Contents

Contents 1

PART 1 - GENERAL 1

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1
1.2 SUMMARY 1
1.3 DEFINITIONS 2
1.4 SUBMITTALS 2
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 7
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 11
1.7 COORDINATION 12

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 12
2.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL MATERIALS 12
2.2 WELDING MATERIALS 14
2.3 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS 14
2.4 PRIMER 16
2.5 GROUT 17
2.6 CONNECTION DESIGN 17
2.7 FABRICATION 17
2.8 SHOP CONNECTIONS 19
2.9 SHOP PRIMING 22
2.10 GALVANIZING 23
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 23

PART 3 - EXECUTION 26
3.1 EXAMINATION 26
3.2 PREPARATION 26
3.3 ERECTION 26
3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS 27
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 28
3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION 29

20/04/2013

SECTION 0512 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Structural steel.

2. Bolts, washers, and other steel accessories

3. Shear studs.

4. Welded steel connections.

5. Grout.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for independent test-
ing agency procedures and administrative requirements.

2. Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Dispos-
al" and Sustainable Design Requirements.

3. Division 03 Section Cast-in-Place Concrete for post-
installed concrete anchors.

4. Division 05 Section "Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel
Framing" for additional requirements for architecturally ex-
posed structural steel.

5. Division 05 Section "Steel Decking" for field installation of
shear studs through deck.

6. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel lintels and
shelf angles not attached to structural-steel frame miscellane-
ous steel fabrications and other metal items not defined as
structural steel.

7. Division 05 Section "Metal Stairs."

8. Division 05 Section Metal Grating.

9. Division 05 Section Decorative Metal.

10. Division 07 Section Applied Fireproofing.

11. Division 09 Section Paintings and Coatings for surface-
preparation and priming requirements.

20/04/2013

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) 303, "Code of Standard
Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

B. Heavy Sections: Rolled and built-up sections as follows and subjected to
special notch toughness, fabrication, welding and inspection requirements as
defined in this specification:

1. Shapes included in ASTM A6 with flanges thicker than 50mm

2. Welded built-up members with plates thicker than 50mm.

3. Column base plates thicker than 50mm.

4. All ASTM A6 shapes with flange thickness greater than 1-1/2 inches
(38mm) that are part of the Seismic Load Resisting System.

5. Welded built-up members with plates thicker than 1-1/2 inches
(38mm) if part of the Seismic Load Resisting System.

C. Design Story Drift: Difference in lateral deflections of the top and bottom of a
story under consideration.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General:

1. Review of submittals if of a general nature only, and responsibility for
conformance with the intent of the Contract Documents shall remain
with the Contractor. Review does not imply nor state that Contractor
has correctly interpreted the Contract Drawings.

2. All submissions shall be in accordance with the submission schedule
developed and agreed between the Company Representative and
Contractor at the commencement of the project. Submission shall
include dates of order and delivery of materials to the shop and the
site.

3. Shop drawing schedule shall allow adequate time for reviews.
Submittal shall include all related pieces in an assembled or area.
The Contractor shall allow adequate time in shop drawing
preparation stage for the dimensioning process and coordination with
the Architectural Drawings and those of other disciplines. Submit a
schedule for steel shop and erection drawings. Assume a maximum
of one hundred drawings will be reviewed in any 10 working day peri-
od.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components, including
anchor rod setting plans, details of layout and connections, fabrication of all
members, and element and erection plans. Direct copies of the Contract
Documents are not acceptable as a submission from the Contractor.

1. Submit shop drawings to Architect for review and obtain Architects
acceptance prior to start of fabrication. Where shop drawings are re-
submitted, the Contractor shall cloud and identify all changes made

20/04/2013

due to additions, deletions, and corrections to the shop drawing.
Shop drawings resubmitted without each change being clouded and
identified will be returned for resubmission.

2. Include layout, member size, and weights, materials used, and beam
marks as well as orientation and relation of members to appropriate
grid lines and setting elevations for column bases. Reference shop
drawings to specific location and detail number on the Structural
Drawings.

3. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes,
openings, doubler plates, stiffeners and other pertinent data, in-
cluding bolt hole sizes, connection materials, and welded joint
designations.

4. Include embedment drawings.

5. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between
shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld.
Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet
welds where backing bars are to remain. Identify WPS applicable to
each shop weld.

6. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop
and field bolts. Identify pre-tensioned and slip-critical high-strength
bolted connections.

7. Indicate surface preparation and finishes.

8. Submit plans of all levels locating the edge of slab at perimeter and
at interior openings.

9. Identify members and connections of the seismic-load-resisting
system.

10. Indicate locations and dimensions of protected zones.

11. Identify demand critical welds.

D. Connection Design:

1. The Contractor is responsible for the design of connections when
they are not fully defined on the Contract Documents.

2. At the commencement of the project submit a letter signed and
sealed by a registered design professional that will supervise the
steel connection design attesting to this responsibility. The registered
design professional shall be appropriately qualified and have a mini-
mum of 5 years experience post registration. The individual must be
agreed by the Company Representative.

3. At the end of the steel shop drawing submission phase submit a let-
ter, signed and sealed by the registered design professional super-
vising the steel connection design, attesting to the completion of the
work.

20/04/2013

4. Submit calculations of all connections. Calculations and details shall
be clearly keyed to the appropriate members on the construction
documents. Calculations shall bear the seal of the registered design
professional supervising design of the steel connections.

5. Contractor shall not proceed with steel erection until these
requirements are fulfilled.

6. The Contractor shall not submit any piece drawing for review until all
connections used on that drawing have been reviewed by the regis-
tered design professional. Drawings submitted with connections that
have not previously been submitted for review will be rejected as in-
complete.

E. 3-D Detailing Model Review

1. The Contractor shall provide, and regularly update, a 3-D detailing
model, referred to here as Design Model. Design Model shall be in a
Tekla compatible format, to be used for preliminary review of steel-
work and for coordination with other disciplines. The Design Model
will be reviewed by the design team, ahead of piece drawing submit-
tals, to reduce the number of re-submittals, and expedite drawing
submittal review.

2. At the commencement of the detailing process, and before any piece
drawings are submitted, the Contractor shall make available the lead
detailer for a period of no less than 3 days, to work at a place desig-
nated by the Company Representative to coordinate the Design
Model, and discuss the detailing process.

3. Before any piece drawing submittal, the Contractor shall provide an
update to the Design Model together with a report listing all the
beams to be submitted, together with their connection codes. The
Company Representative shall provide comments on the submitted
pieces for the Detailer to incorporate before the corresponding piece
drawings are submitted. Any piece drawings submitted without pre-
viously being reviewed in the Design Model will be rejected.

4. The Company Representatives preliminary review of the Design
Model is for general conformance only, and the Contractor shall still
submit for review all erection plans and piece drawings as required
by these specifications.

5. The Design Model shall contain at least the following:
a. Entities that fully define each steel element and the extent of
detailing of each element, including all information that would
be included in a standard structural steel shop drawing.
b. All steel elements identified in the Contract Documents as
well as any other elements required for strength and stability
of the completed erected structure.

F. Erection Procedures:

1. Submit procedures, methods, sequences of erection, temporary
shoring and guying, and equipment proposed for erecting structural
steel. Erection procedures are submitted for record only and there-
fore will not be returned to the Contractor.

G. Bearing Assemblies:

20/04/2013

1. Submit shop drawings and technical specifications for the slide
bearing assemblies used in the project.

H. Jacking and Tensioning Procedures:

1. Submit procedures, methods, sequences of jacking and tensioning,
instrumentation and monitoring devices to be used in the project.

I. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification
Records (PQRs): Provide according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code
- Steel," and AISC 341 Appendix W for each welded joint whether
prequalified or qualified by testing, including items listed below. All submitted
Procedures shall be reviewed by the independent approved agency for
testing prior to use on the project. The Procedures will be submitted to the
Engineer for record only.

1. Power source (constant current or constant voltage).

2. Electrode and flux manufacturer and trade name.

3. Tolerances or the acceptable range of values, applicable to the
various welding parameters.

4. Where back gouging is required provide back gouging criteria (e.g.
smoothness, grinding, gouge shape, inspection by the welder, etc.).

5. For multi-pass welds define sequence and layering of passes.

6. Welding Procedure Qualification Record (WPQR) Tests: For WPSs
that are not pre-qualified per AWS D1.1, submit the supporting
WPQR tests results conducted in accordance with AWS D1.1 along
with the corresponding WPS.

7. When the required effective throat thickness of flare groove welds is
larger than allowed by Table J2.2 of AISC Steel Construction Man-
ual, submit data establishing by qualification the consistent produc-
tion of such larger effective throat thickness. Qualification of effec-
tive throat thickness shall be as required by the AISC specification.

8. For complete penetration butt or groove welds, include test records
for the following only at locations specified on the drawings: tough-
ness, (Charpy tests for weld metal), heat affected zone.

J. Weld Shrinkage and Distortion Procedures: Submit weld shrinkage and dis-
tortion procedures for all welded connections where distortion due to weld
shrinkage may cause damage to the steel material. The welding sequence
and procedures are to minimize the effect of weld shrinkage, residual stress-
es, and to maintain erection tolerances. These procedures shall be reviewed
by independent approved agency for testing, and then used by agency to
verify conformance. Procedures shall be submitted for all principal connec-
tion types. The number and type of welded connections to be reviewed shall
be subject to agreement with the Company Representative. These shall in-
clude, but not limited to the following:

1. Welding of continuity plates and doubler plates.

2. Field welding.

3. Fabricated box sections.

20/04/2013

4. Fabricated node connections

5. Cranked joints of the plate and box sections.

6. Welded truss joints.

K. Fastener Installation Procedures: Submit written procedures for the pre- in-
stallation testing, installation snugging, pre-tensioning, and post-installation
inspection of fasteners. The procedures shall meet all requirements of the
Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC) "Specification for Struc-
tural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts" and the Contract Documents.

L. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer, fabricator, professional engineer,
independent approved agency for testing.

M. Welding certificates.

N. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over
shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

O. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical proper-
ties, regardless of thickness or use. Reports shall comply with ASTM A6.

1. Submit a mill report for each heat of steel used, and certified fastener
reports for all fasteners, including nuts, washers and direct tension
indicators prior to the start of fabrication. For unsatisfactory mill test
report, retest steel.

2. Include Charpy test results for heavy sections and for materials
where Charpy values are specified.

3. Mill test reports shall include ladle analysis and tensile elongation
and bend tests.

4. Mill reports shall be traceable to individual pieces of steel used.

5. In addition to other requirements mill reports shall address the
following elements: copper, columbium, chromium, nickel, mo-
lybdenum, silicone, and vanadium.
6. Provide mill reports for all welding consumables used on this project.
P. Contractor Certificate of Compliance for Materials: Submit a Certificate of
Compliance letter stating that the Contractor has reviewed the submitted
manufacturers test reports and certifications, and that the materials being
furnished for the project are in conformance with the applicable standards
and project documents. The Certificate of Compliance letter shall be
submitted along with the manufacturers test reports and certifications for
structural steel, fasteners, welding filler metals, and shear studs.

Q. Product Test Reports and Certifications: Submit manufacturers test reports
and certifications as listed below. Test Reports and Certifications are submit-
ted for record only and therefore will not be returned to the Contractor. A
copy of the test reports and certifications shall be sent to the owners Quality
Assurance Agency. The Contractor Certificate of Compliance letter shall ac-
company the Manufacturers Certifications.

20/04/2013

1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemi-
cal analysis. Certifications for high strength bolts shall conform to
certification requirements contained in ASTM A325, A490, F1852,
F959, F2280.

2. Direct-tension indicators.

3. Tension-control, high-strength bolt-nut-washer assemblies.

4. Shear stud connectors. Shear studs, as supplied, shall meet the
requirements of AWS D1.1, Sections 7.2 and 7.3.

5. Shop primers.

6. Non-shrink grout.

7. Welding electrodes, fluxes and shielded gas products. Certifications
shall satisfy the applicable AWS A5 and project requirements.

8. Spray-on fireproofing. Submit certificate issued by paint manu-
facturer ensuring compatibility between the primer and the
spray-on fireproofing.

R. Source quality-control reports.

S. Submit fabricators identification mark system to Testing Agency prior to
fabrication.

T. As-Built Drawings: At the end of the work included in this Section submit a
complete set of reproducible drawings incorporating all changes, additions
and deletions to the Construction Drawings due to revisions, change orders,
field conditions, or any other reason.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency: Approved Testing Agency: The Contactor shall engage an
independent approved agency to perform tests and and prepare test reports.
The selection of the independent approved agency shall be subject to the
approval of the Company Representative. The Company Representative
may, at his discretion, call for tests tor inspections to be verified by separate
approved agency. Shop and field testing and inspection of steelwork speci-
fied in this document or requested by the Company Representative will be
performed by an independent approved agency.

1. The Testing Agency shall be furnished with the following:
a. One complete set of fabrication and erection drawings.
b. Material bills, cutting lists, order sheets and mill test reports.
c. Information regarding time, place of rolling and shipment of
materials to shop.
d. If requested, representative sample pieces for testing.
e. Full and ample means and assistance for testing materials.
f. Access and facilities, including scaffolding, temporary work
platforms, etc., for testing and inspection at all places where
materials or components are stored, fabricated or erected in
the mill, shop or field.
g. Complete set of welding procedures.
h. Welder qualifications.
i. AISC fabricator certification documents, QA/QC manual and
most recent AISC audit.
j. Reports for all Contractor tests and inspections.

20/04/2013

2. In addition to the work specified elsewhere in the Contract
Documents, the Testing Agency shall review the following for
compliance with project specifications:
a. Fastener Installation Procedures.
b. WPSs and WPQRs.
c. Manufacturers Test Reports and Certifications.
d. Welder qualification.

B. Comply with applicable provisions of the current edition of the following speci-
fications and documents, except where more stringent requirements are
shown or specified:

1. The 2009 International Building Code of the International Code
Council (ICC) in its entirety, with all amendments, errata, and sup-
plements thereto and the Saudi Building Code (SBC). In case of
conflict the SBC shall take precedence

2. AISC 303 Code of Standard Practice for Structural Steel Buildings
and Bridges.

3. AISC 360, Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.

4. AISC Specifications for Architectural Exposed Structural Steel.

5. AISC Steel Construction Manual.

6. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or
A490 Bolts." with supplements.

7. American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1 and D1.8.

8. Saudi Aramco Standard SAES-H-001: Selection Requirements for
Industrial Facilities.

9. Saudi Aramco Standard SAES-H-100: Painting required for Industrial
Facilities.

10. Saudi Aramco Standard SAES-H-101: Approved protective coating
systems.

11. ASTM A6: Standard Specification for General Requirements for
Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling.

12. ASTM A36: Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.

13. ASTM A53: Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-
Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.

14. ASTM A108: Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy,
Cold-Finished

15. ASTM A193: Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless
Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature or High Pressure
Service and Other Special Purpose Applications.

16. ASTM A307: Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners.

17. ASTM A320: Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless
Steel Bolting Materials for Low-Temperature Service.

20/04/2013

18. ASTM A325: Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat
Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

19. ASTM A370: Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical
Testing of Steel Products.

20. ASTM A449: Standard Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and
Studs, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile
Strength, General Use.

21. ASTM A490: Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel,
Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.

22. ASTM A500: Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and
Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes

23. ASTM A563: Standard Specification for Carbons and Alloy Steel
Nuts

24. ASTM A572: Standard Specification for High Strength Low-Alloy
Columbium Vanadium Structural Steel.

25. ASTM A607: Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, High-
Strength, Low-Alloy, Columbium or Vanadium, or Both, Hot-Rolled
and Cold-Rolled.

26. ASTM A687: Standard Specification for High-Strength Nonheaded
Steel Bolts and Studs.

27. ASTM A770: Standard Specification for Through-Thickness Tension
Testing of Steel Plates for Special Applications.

28. ASTM A992: Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes.

29. ASTM C1107: Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-
Cement Grout.

30. ASTM E94: Standard Guide for Radiographic Examination.

31. ASTM E164: Standard Practice for Contact Ultrasonic Testing of
Weldments.

32. ASTM E165: Standard Practice for Liquid Penetrant Examination for
General Industry.

33. ASTM E488: Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in
Concrete and Masonry Elements.

34. ASTM E709: Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing.

35. ASTM F436: Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers.

36. ASTM F959: Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type
Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners

37. ASTM F1852: Standard Specification for Twist Off Type Tension
Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated,
120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

20/04/2013

38. ASTM F2280: Standard Specification for Twist Off Type Tension
Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated,
150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

39. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
(AASHTO) Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) Bridge De-
sign Specifications.

40. ANSI/AISC 341-05 Seismic Provision for Structural Steel Buildings

C. All work shall be performed by qualified operators experienced in their field of
work and as otherwise required by these specifications.

D. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC
Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Cat-
egory STD. The fabricator shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in
similar types of fabrication. Fabricator shall be able to furnish evidence of
ability, facilities, proficiency of personnel, and completed projects with similar
structural systems.

E. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC
Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector,
Category ACSE or CSE. The erector shall have a minimum of 5 years expe-
rience in similar types of erection. Erector shall be able to furnish evidence of
ability, facilities, proficiency of personnel, and completed projects with similar
structural systems.

F. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint
Endorsement P1, P2, P3 or SSPC-QP 3, "Standard Procedure for Evaluating
Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators."

G. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS
D1.1 for each process, position and joint configuration. Each operator shall
have been qualified as prescribed by AWS and shall be approved by the in-
dependent approved agency. Qualification performed more than six
months prior to the start of the welding by the welder is acceptable, provided
written documentation is submitted showing that the welder has continued to
use the applicable welding process on an ongoing basis since the test was
conducted, with no lapse in service exceeding six months.

1. Welder Certificates shall be submitted to the independent approved
agency prior to welding.

2. Require welders to retake the qualification test if, as determined by
the Company Representative or the independent approved agency,
there is a reasonable doubt as to the proficiency of the welder. If the
welder does not requalify, he shall not perform any welding on the
project.

3. In addition to AWS D1.1 requirements on welder Qualification, qualify
welders making welds with restricted access (such as welding the bot-
tom flanges of girders to column flanges through cope or access
holes in the girder webs) by using a mock-up assembly identical to
the actual conditions of producing weldments in the field, using the
approved WPS.

4. Welder qualification shall include passing the bend test [and Charpy
tests when Charpy values are specified for the electrode.

20/04/2013

H. Contractors Quality Control Plan: Quality Control includes the functions per-
formed by the Contractor to ensure that the material and workmanship of
structural steel construction meets the project specifications and applicable
standards. The Contractor shall submit a Quality Control Plan that addresses
all inspection issues, including fabrication/erection testing and inspection per
AWS D1.1 and AISC 341 Appendix Q. The verification testing and inspection
carried out by the independent approved agency does not relieve the contrac-
tor of the responsibility for conducting their own quality control/inspection pro-
gram to ensure the requirements of the Contract Documents have been met.
The Contractors Quality Control Plan will be reviewed by the independent ap-
proved agency.

I. Quality Control Inspector Qualifications: Along with Quality Control Plan,
Contractor shall submit written qualifications for all inspectors to be assigned
Quality Control functions for structural steel work, including general inspec-
tion, bolting inspection, welding inspection, and non-destructive
testing. Qualifications for welding inspectors shall show evidence of ability to
monitor all WPS variables, check weld sizes, and visually detect weld
defects.

J. Unidentifiable Materials: Materials delivered with certificates are classified as
identifiable; those without certificates are classified as unidentifiable.

1. Testing of Unidentifiable Material: By Contractors testing agency;
paid for by Contractor.
a. General: Test material not identifiable by heat number and
mill test or other acceptable manufacturer's identification per
ASTM A370 as follows.
b. Shear Studs: Each lot of 100 studs; tensile tests on 3
finished studs per AWS.
c. Structural Shapes and Plates: From coupons taken from
material; one tensile test and one bend test per 5 tons of
each shape.
d. High Strength Bolts: Each lot of 100 bolts; tensile tests on 2
bolts in full size and one tensile test on a 12mm diameter
machined specimen.
e. Other Materials: Test as directed.

K. Prefabrication and Preinstallation Conference: Prior to performing fabrication
or erection work, there shall be a pre-fabrication and pre-erection meeting to
review welding procedures, bolting procedures, and inspection requirements
for all welding and bolting operations. The meeting shall include the following
individuals: Owners Representative, Testing Agency, Special Inspector,
Steel Fabricator and Erector personnel supervising the shop, field and
Quality Control work.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Do not handle structural steelwork until paint has thoroughly dried. Care
shall be exercised to avoid abrasions and other damage.

B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep
steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other
supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from
corrosion and deterioration. Material shall be kept free from dirt, grease, and
other foreign matter.

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause dis-
tortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures.
Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed, to the

20/04/2013

acceptance of the Company Representative, and at no additional
cost to the Company. Materials showing evidence of damage will be
rejected and shall be immediately removed from the site.

C. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's
labels intact.

1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided the independent approved
agency observes repackaging and seals containers.

2. Clean and re-lubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before
use.

3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning
and lubricating ASTM F1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners
after lubrication.

D. Requirements for storage and handling of electrodes shall be per AWS D1.1.
Additional requirements include:

1. Long term storage of weld consumables shall be indoors, where
moisture or dew does not collect, and in undamaged manufacturers
shipping bags, boxes, and containers.

2. Open Flux Cored Arc Welding (FCAW) electrodes shall be com-
pletely covered during hours of non-use (i.e., weekends, nights of
nonuse, days of nonuse, etc.). Where rain or dew could be
expected to collect (i.e., open floors of erection site, open shop bays,
etc.), electrodes shall also be covered.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Surveys: Contractor shall conduct field surveys and field verification as
required to incorporate existing conditions from previous works, such as
foundations and existing buildings, to the work before shop drawings are
produced.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to
other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams,
templates, instructions, and directions for installation.

C. Notify the Company Representative in sufficient time prior to shop or field
fabrication or erection to permit testing and inspection without delaying work.

D. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them.
Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' recommendations to ensure
that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL MATERIALS

A. All materials are subject to the Owners Representative's approval.

B. All structural steel shapes shall be new, unused and perfect stock, free from
millscale, rust, flake, pitting, and imperfections, without bends, kinks, and dis-
tortions. Shop splicing of members shall only be permitted if the member ex-
ceeds maximum mill length, or if approved by the Owners Representative
and so shown on the drawings.

20/04/2013

C. All columns, beams, purlins, channels, angles, and plates shall conform to :

Fabricated/plated sections ASTM A572M GRADE 345
Wide flange ASTM A992M GRADE 345
WT ASTM A992M GRADE 345
Channel ASTM A572M GRADE 345
Angle ASTM A36M GRADE 250
Plate ASTM A36M GRADE 250
Built up ASTM A572M GRADE 345
Round HSS ASTM A500 GRADE 315
Rectangular HSS ASTM A500 GRADE 315
Doubler and stiffener plates ASTM A572M GRADE 345
Other connection material ASTM A36M GRADE 250
CHS EN 10219 or EN 10210 GRADE 355

Note : CHS sections may be adopted in the design subject to verification
of grade by appropriate mill certificates and agreement with the Company
Representative. Structural steel materials and shapes equivalent to ASTM
materials maybe used as substitutes in accordance with Appendix 1 of
Aramco 12-SAMSS-007 standard.

D. Steel pipe shall conform to ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B or ASTM A500,
Grade B Alternative yield stresses may be proposed by the Contractor and
may be adopted subject to agreement with the Company Representative.

E. Steel tube shapes shall conform to ASTM A500, Grade B or C Alternative
yield stresses may be proposed by the Contractor and may be adopted
subject to agreement with the Company Representative.

F. Heavy Sections: Heavy sections as defined in this specification shall have
toughness properties meeting a Charpy V-Notch (CVN) value of 27 joules at
21 degrees C [20 ft-lb at 70 degrees F]. Testing shall be conducted in
accordance with the current AISC specification.

G. Through Thickness Properties.

1. The contractor is responsible for ensuring that all steel plate complies
with the requirements of the specified standard and has adequate
through thickness properties to satisfy the requirements of his
welding procedures and welding sequence and that all material at or
adjacent to welded locations is free from laminations, centerline seg-
regation or other crack like indications on completion of welding. The
contractor is responsible for determining the quality class of the steel
with enhanced through thickness properties which may be required
(depending on plate thickness). For example BS EN 10164 or ASTM
A770.

2. Not less than three weeks prior to ordering the steel , the steelwork
contractor shall submit, for the Company Representative to review, a
report which documents the contractors strategy (material selection,
welding procedure and inspection) which will be implemented for
controlling through thickness stresses during welding and ensuring
the above criteria are satisfied. Levels of testing of both steel plate
and welds, before and after fabrication, to ensure the above criteria
are satisfied are to be submitted to the Company Representative for
review not less than three weeks prior to fabrication.

H. Built-up structural sections, with physical dimensions and geometrical and struc-
tural properties equal to the rolled steel sections shown on the drawings, may be
substituted for the rolled section provided the following requirements are met:

20/04/2013

1. Built-up sections shall be fabricated by a recognized manufacturer
with a minimum of five years of experience in the fabrication of these
sections.

2. All quality control procedures and testing methods shall be submitted
to the Company Representative for approval prior to fabrication of the
sections.

I. Members fabricated through cold forming process shall have a minimum yield
strength of 345 MPa) and conform to the physical specifications of ASTM
A607, Grade 50.

2.2 WELDING MATERIALS

A. Welding Material: Filler metal requirements shall conform to AWS D1.1 and
AISC "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings". Minimum classified tensile
strength of 70 ksi (483N/mm, E70). Use low hydrogen electrodes as defined
by AWS D1.1, unless noted otherwise. For all CJP welds used on Heavy
Structural Sections that are not part of the Seismic Load Resisting System
the filler metal shall have a Charpy V-Notch (CVN) toughness of at least 27
joules at 21 degrees C (20 ft-lb at 70 degrees F).

2.3 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS
A. Structural Bolts: Shall be unfinished conform to ASTM A325 or ASTM A490.
B. All structural bolts except ASTM A490 or ASTM A490M shall be galvanized in
accordance with 12-SAMSS-007. ASTM A490 and ASTM A490M Bolts shall
not be galvanized.

C. All ASTM A490 or ASTM A490M bolts to external steel connections shall re-
ceive a corrosion protection system equivalent to APCS 1F in accordance
with 12-SAMSS-007, SAES-H-100 & SAES-H-101 after fixing. All ASTM
A490 or ASTM A490M bolts to internal steel connections shall receive a
corrosion protection system equivalent to APCS 1B in accordance with 12-
SAMSS-007, SAES-H-100 & SAES-H-101 after fixing.

D. All other mechanical fasteners shall be galvanized in accordance with 12-
SAMSS-007

E. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325, Type 1, heavy-hex
steel structural bolts unless noted otherwise; ASTM A563, Grade C, heavy-
hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel
washers; all with plain finish. ASTM F1852 Twist-Off Type Torque Control
Bolts are a suitable alternative to ASTM A325 bolts, although use of such
bolts shall not negate the requirement that Direct Tension Indicators be used
for inspection.

1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F959, Type 325, compressible-
washer type with plain finish. Use on all A325 bolts where slip-
critical or fully pre-tensioned bolts are required.

F. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A490, Type 1, heavy-hex
steel structural bolts, where noted on drawings; ASTM A563, Grade DH,
heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F436, Type 1, hardened carbon-
steel washers with plain finish. ASTM F2280 Twist-Off Type Torque Control
Bolts are a suitable alternative to ASTM A490 bolts, although use of such

20/04/2013

bolts shall not negate the requirement that Direct Tension Indicators be used
for inspection.

1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F959, Type 490, compressible-
washer type with plain finish. Use on all A490 bolts where slip-
critical or fully pre-tensioned bolts are required.

G. Unfinished Bolts and Nuts (Machine Bolts) and Threaded Rods: ASTM A307,
Grade A, low carbon steel bolts and nuts; ASTM F436, Type 1, hardened
carbon-steel washers.

H. Shear Studs: ASTM A108, Grades 1015 or 1020, headed-stud type, cold-
finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type B and conform to requirements of
AWS D1.1 Section 7.

I. Anchor Bolts: Conform to ASTM A307 or ASTM A36 for standard strength
and ASTM A449 or ASTM A687 for high strength anchor bolts.

J. Expansion Bolts: Conform to ASTM A193, A320, or A325. Test per ASTM E-
488.

K. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 36 or Grade 55, weldable per
section S1 and CVN toughness of at least 20 ft-lbs at 65 degrees F per sec-
tion S4

L. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 36 or Grade 55, weldable,
straight.

1. Nuts: ASTM A563 [heavy-] hex carbon steel.

2. Plate Washers: ASTM A36 carbon steel.

3. Washers: ASTM F436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel.

M. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M, ASTM A193, Grade B7, ASTM A354,
Grade BD, ASTM A449, A572, Grade 50.

1. Nuts: ASTM A563 [heavy-]hex carbon steel.
2. Washers: ASTM F436, Type 1, hardened, ASTM A36 carbon steel.
N. Tie Rods: ASTM A36, ASTM A193, Grade B7, ASTM A354, Grade BD,
ASTM A449, A572, Grade 50.

1. Nuts: ASTM A563 [heavy-]hex carbon steel.
2. Washers: ASTM F436, Type 1, hardened, ASTM A36 carbon steel.
O. Turnbuckles: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A108,
Grade 1035. Dimensions and minimum capacities to conform to the values
listed in AISC Steel Construction Manual.

P. Eye Bolts and Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A108,
Grade 1030.

Q. Sleeve Nuts: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A108,
Grade 1018. Minimum proof load of sleeve nuts shall be such that when

20/04/2013

loaded axially the sleeve nut shall be stronger than the ultimate capacity of
the connected parts.

R. Structural Slide Bearings: Low-friction assemblies, of configuration indicated,
that provide vertical transfer of loads and allow horizontal movement.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with performance
requirements and agreement of the Company Representative, pro-
vide products by one of the following available manufacturers offer-
ing products in compliance with AASHTO LRFD Specifications
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a. Ekspan
b. BASF Wabo
c. Amscot Structural Products Corp.
d. Fluorocarbon Company Limited.
e. R.J. Watson Bridge & Structural Engineered Systems.
f. Seismic Energy Products, L.P.
.

2. Mating Surfaces: PTFE and mirror-finished stainless steel.

3. Coefficient of Friction: Not more than 0.03

2.4 PRIMER

A. Comply with Division 09 Section Paintings and Coatings and "High-
Performance Coatings".

B. Primer Paint shall comply with Saudi Aramco Engineering Standards SAES-
H-001, SAES-H-100 and SAES-H-101 and shall be compatible with finish
paints and intumescent coatings.

C. Primer:

1. Typical Interior Primer: Saudi Aramco Approved Coating System
APCS-1B in accordance with 12-SAMSS-007, SAES-H-100 & SAES-
H-101.

2. Typical Exterior Primer: Saudi Aramco Approved Coating System
APCS-1E in accordance with 12-SAMSS-007, SAES-H-100 & SAES-
H-101.

D. VOC Content of Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply
with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Anticorrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC
content of not more than 250 g/L.

E. Do not paint surfaces which are to be welded.

F. Reinstate all primer where damaged during erection.
G. All painting shall be according to SAES-H-100.

20/04/2013

2.5 GROUT

A. Grout shall have a minimum 2400 psi (16MPa) compressive strength in 48
hours and 6000 psi (60MPa) compressive strength at 28 days.

1. Conbextra HF cementitious grout or equal.

B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C1107, factory-packaged,
nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water
to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

2.6 CONNECTION DESIGN

A. Contractor shall design all steel connections..
B. Type of Connections
1. All connections shall be one of the following:
a. High-strength bolts assemblies.
b. Unfinished bolts assemblies.
c. Welds.

2. When the type of connection is outlined on the Drawings use that
type of connection unless otherwise approved in writing by the
Company Representative.

3. Use a connection other than unfinished bolts where required by code
and in the following locations:
a. All beam and column connections and splices.
b. Connections that are a part of the lateral force resisting
system.
c. Connections for supports of running machinery or of other
live loads which produce impact.
d. Connections carrying cooling tower loads.
e. Beams supporting columns or posts.
f. Connections for cantilevers.
g. Full and partial moment connections.
C. Design Criteria.
1. Design connections for the loads and according to the requirements
in the Contract Documents and the applicable standards as set out in
The Site Wide Technical Brief Structures.

2. Bolts shall be at least 20mm in diameter.

D. The Drawings the intent for typical connection types. The Contractor shall
adopt such connection typologies unless otherwise agreed by the Company
Representative.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible.
Fabricate according to AISC 303, AISC 360. Sub assemblies are to be
assembled on site at ground level in controlled conditions.

20/04/2013

1. Camber structural-steel members where required. Fabricate beams
and girders with natural camber upward, unless noted otherwise on
the drawings. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up.

2. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A6 and
maintain markings until structural steel has been erected.

3. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Members shall be
fabricated for delivery in a sequence that will expedite erection and
minimize field handling of structural steel.

4. Splice members only where accepted by the Company
Representative.

5. All hollow members exposed to weather shall be provided with weep
holes at appropriate locations to prevent the potential accumulation
of water.

6. Grind burrs, sharp arrises and ragged edges that would prevent solid
seating of the connected parts.

7. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units,
before starting shop-priming operations.

B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent
possible. An unguided torch may be used provided the cut is within 3mm of
the required line.
1. Plane thermally cut edges to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1.
C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal
surfaces.

1. Use standard holes. Holes shall be drilled or punched at right angles
to the surface of the metal. Making or enlarging holes by burning is
prohibited.

2. Flame cut holes for fasteners are not acceptable.

3. Holes in column baseplates shall be no more than 10mm larger than
the nominal bolt size.

4. For the following conditions holes shall be drilled (not punched), even
where punching is allowed by referenced standards: a) material hav-
ing a thickness in excess of 22mm or the hole diameter; b)
column base plates; c) holes less than 150mm from an edge that
requires a CJP weld; d) where holes are subjected to welding
shrinkage stresses.

D. Bending Steel Plate:

1. Bend plates perpendicular to the rolling direction.

2. Grind flame cut plate edges transverse to the bend line.

3. Grind out nicks in plate edges transverse to the bend line.

4. Round sharp corners on plate edges transverse to the bend line.

20/04/2013

E. Heat Straightening: Will be permissible by the use of properly controlled heat,
skilled personnel, proper equipment and in accordance with documents pre-
pared by the fabricator and accepted. Reject materials that contain kinks
or sharp angles. Material straightened prior to fabrication shall be rejected
where it shows signs of distress or defects.

F. Planing and Milling: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members
transmitting bearing loads. Mill bearing surfaces to true planes. Mill ends of
columns perpendicular to centerline axis connection mid-depth points at ends
of member. Cut and fit column and bearing stiffeners in manner to provide
bearing over entire cross section

1. Column Base Plates
a. From 50mm through 100mm Thickness: Straighten by
pressing.
b. Over 100mm Thickness: Plane top for column bearing; plane
bottom when bearing on steel.

G. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted
according to SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool
Cleaning."

H. Shear Studs: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of
shear studs. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear studs ac-
cording to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.

I. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and
for other work to pass through steel framing members.

1. Provide holes, slots and openings together with necessary reinforcing
as shown on the Drawings required for securing work of other trades
to the work specified here. Where openings are shown on the Draw-
ings no change shall be permitted without prior approval. Openings
shall be done in the shop.

2. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not
thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning.

3. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, [mechanically thermal cut,] or punch
holes perpendicular to steel surfaces.

4. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to
receive other work.

J. The Contractor shall cooperate fully with requests form inspection and testing
personnel for access to the connections and joints to be inspected and
tested. This includes beam and column turning in shop, weld backing re-
moval when nondestructive examination indicates rejectable conditions,
and access to platforms or scaffolding as required to perform the work safely.

2.8 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. General Bolting:

1. Product containers must be marked with lot numbers and traceability
information so that correspondence with mill reports can be estab-
lished. Manufacturers symbol and grade markings shall appear on all
bolts, nuts, through-hardened washers and direct tension indicators.

20/04/2013

2. Bolts shall be of a length that will extend to a point at least flush with
the surface of the nuts, though not more than a length equal to the
height of the nut, beyond the nuts unless otherwise noted.

3. Bolts shall be installed with threads excluded from the shear plane.

4. Washers shall be used on all bolts. Use beveled washers where
bolts bear on sloping surface.

B. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts" for type
of bolt and type of joint specified. Contact surfaces of bolted parts shall as a
minimum comply with the Class A requirements.

1. Joint Type shall be as noted on drawings.

2. Direct tension indicator (load indicating washers or "Tension-Set"
bolts) method shall be used at slip-critical connections. "Turn-of-Nut"
methods are not an acceptable alternative.

3. When connection has bolts and welds, fully tighten bolts prior to
welding with the exception that in moment connections the flange
welds shall be completed prior to final tightening of high strength
bolts.

4. When already tensioned bolts have had their tension relaxed, replace
the bolt and tension indicator and re-tighten.

C. Unfinished Bolts (Machine Bolts): Machine bolts shall be brought to a snug
tight condition. Mutilate bolt threads for unfinished bolts to prevent the nuts
from backing off.

D. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.8 for tolerances,
appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods
used in correcting welding work.

1. Shop welds shall be inspected in the shop before the work is painted
or shipped.

2. Weld sizes where shown shall be assumed to be effective weld
sizes.

3. All groove or butt welds shall be full penetration unless noted
otherwise on the Drawings.

4. Where structural steel members are to remain exposed in the fin-
ished work, welds exposed to view shall be uniformly made and
ground smooth to the acceptance of the Company Representative.
The acceptance criteria shall be tested and agreed using mock-ups
of architecturally sensitive connections. The Company Representa-
tive will specify the number and the location of mock-ups required.

5. Weld tabs shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1. In addition, weld
tabs shall extend beyond the edge of the joint a distance equal to the
plate thickness but not less than 25mm except at access holes in
beam/girder webs and at continuity plate clips. Weld tabs shall be
oriented parallel to the joint preparation and to the weld direction.
Weld dams are not allowed.

20/04/2013

6. Remove weld tabs and backup plates and grind surfaces smooth as
required for inspection or testing. Where tabs or backup bars inter-
fere with architectural treatment or are exposed to view in the final
structure, remove and grind smooth. Backup bars and run-off tabs
at Heavy Structural Sections shall be removed.

7. Splices of members in tension, all members of moment frames and
all members of braced frames that are made from heavy steel sec-
tions shall be made in conformance with Section J1.5 of AISC
360.

8. Weld variables shall be consistent with the recommendations of the
electrode manufacturer.

9. Do not weld into column flange-to-web intersection as defined the
AISC k and k1 distances except for the doubler plate to column
welds. Continuity plate welds shall stay clear of this area as noted
on the drawings.

10. Sequence the work as necessary to accommodate testing.

11. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain
true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for
mill material.

12. Welding Procedures:
a. Weld only in accordance with the Welding Procedure Specifi-
cations. WPS shall be readily available to all welders, in-
spectors, and supervisors during the production process.
b. Consider toughness and notch sensitivity of steel in for-
mation of the welding procedures to prevent brittle and
premature fracture during fabrication and erection.
Toughness requirements are to match those of the parent
metal.
c. Weld in a manner to minimize accumulation and concentra-
tion of through-thickness strains due to weld shrinkage. Se-
quence welds in a manner to reduce residual stresses
(caused by welding) to a minimum value. Welding proce-
dures shall incorporate measures necessary to eliminate
cracking.
d. Do not mix different electrodes in the same weld joint unless
the interactions have been shown not to cause problems.
e. Stringer passes only, no weaving or wash passes.
Manipulation of the electrode for vertical welds (oscillation)
shall be kept to a maximum movement of 4 to 5 electrode
diameters.
f. Welding shall not begin until joint elements are bolted or
tacked in intimate contact and adjusted to dimensions shown
in the Drawings, with proper allowance for any weld shrink-
age.
g. All tack welds shall be of the same quality as final welds.
Preheat of tack welds is only necessary at the immediate ar-
ea where the tack is placed. Preheat temperature is the
same as for welding. Tack welds must be placed where they
will be consumed in the weld, or be ground out to a depth of
3mm but not rewelded unless the gouge is greater than
3mm. If rewelding is necessary, it shall then be considered a
new weld with all relevant weld inspections.

13. Refer to the Structural Drawings for additional requirements.

20/04/2013

14. Reinforcing bars welded to steel plates shall be in accordance ACI
318 and with the Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel
ANSI/AWS D1.4 of the American welding Society. ASTM reinforcing
bar specifications, except for ASTM A 706, shall be supplemented to
require report of material properties necessary to conform to the re-
quirements in ANSI/AWS D1.4. In accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.4
the contractor is to prepare and submit written welding procedure
specifications conforming to the Welding Code. The form shown in
Appendix A of the Welding Code is to be used and this shows the in-
formation required for such a specification for each joint welding pro-
cedure.

2.9 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime all steel surfaces excepting the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of
partially embedded members to a depth of 50mm.

2. Surfaces to be field welded and areas within 100mm on each side of
field welds.

3. Top surfaces of beams to receive metal deck.

4. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted. . Areas with high-strength bolts
exposed to the weather shall receive a primer coat compatible with
slip-critical type connections.

5. Galvanized surfaces.

6. Machined surfaces.

7. Welded shear studs.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and
mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to
the applicable Saudi Aramco specification requirements for each primer.

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to
manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by the man-
ufacturer to provide the minimum dry film thickness for the Saudi Aramco
corrosion protection system specified. Use priming methods that result in
full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after
assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it
from first.

3. Provide adequate measures to demonstrate to client representative
minimum thickness of dry film are being achieved. This method
should be submitted for approval prior to application. Note the dry
film thickness values are minimums and are NOT nominal or mean
values permitting any negative tolerance.

D. All internal structural steel members, where fire protection is not required
shall receive corrosion protection equivalent to APCS-1B in accordance with
12-SAMSS-007, SAES-H-100 & SAES-H-101 and the Site Wide Technical
Brief - Structures.

20/04/2013

E. All internal structural steel members, where fire protection is required shall
receive corrosion protection equivalent to APCS-1B in accordance with 12-
SAMSS-007, SAES-H-100 & SAES-H-101, and shall additionally incorporate
an appropriate intumescent coating and sealer to achieve the required fire
rating and appearance.

F. All external structural steel members, where fire protection is not required
shall receive a corrosion protection system equivalent to APCS 1F in ac-
cordance with 12-SAMSS-007, SAES-H-100 & SAES-H-101 and the Site
Wide Technical Brief - Structures.

G. All external structural steel members, where fire protection is required shall
receive corrosion protection equivalent to APCS-1F in accordance with 12-
SAMSS-007, SAES-H-100 & SAES-H-101, and shall additionally incorporate
an appropriate intumescent coating and sealer to achieve the required fire
rating and appearance. Where the Contractor can demonstrate that a modi-
fied system utilizing intumescent coatings in place of the barrier coat provides
equivalent corrosion protection performance, the barrier coat may me omitted.

H. All openings for bolt access holes and the like in hollow sections to have a
closing piece, where not detailed or required as part of the connection de-
sign, welded with a continuous weld to seal the section following installa-
tion, bolt tightening and final inspection. Also applies to otherwise open
ends of hollow sections

I. The following surfaces shall be temporarily protected by a thin coating of
varnish or lacquer: 1.Unpainted areas around fillet welds. 2. Steel around
high strength bolts. 3. Machined surfaces.

2.10 GALVANIZING

A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to
structural steel according to ASTM A123 and to bolts, nuts, and washers
according to ASTM A153 that connect galvanized components, except that
ASTM A490 bolts shall not be hot-dip galvanized.

1. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work
unless they will function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder
and filing off smooth.

2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Independent approved agency to perform shop tests and in-
spections as defined by AWS, AISC and these specifications. The selection of
the independent approved agency shall be subject to the approval of the
Company Representative Testing Agency shall summarize their finding in in-
spection and testing reports. Reports shall identify any findings that are not in
compliance with requirements of the project specifications. The Company
Representative may, at his discretion, call for tests tor inspections to be veri-
fied by a separate approved agency

1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel
work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspec-
tions.

B. See Part 1 of this specification for additional testing and inspection require-
ments. As a minimum the inspector will make all tests and inspections as re-
quired by the International Building Code 2009 and the Saudi Building Code.
Testing Agency will make all the tests and inspections. The

20/04/2013

Contractors Quality Control Plan, including proposed extent of testing and
inspection shall be reviewed and approved by the Company Representative.

C. Contractor shall correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections
indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.

1. Company Representative reserves right, at any time before final
acceptance, to reject material not complying with requirements.

2. Any tests that may be necessary to reconfirm any noncompliance of
original work, and as may be necessary to show compliance of cor-
rected work, shall be at Contractor's expense.

D. Each person installing connections shall be assigned an identifying symbol or
mark and all shop and field connections shall be so identified so that the In-
spector can refer back to the person making the connection.

E. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected
according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or
A490 Bolts."

1. High Strength Bolted Connections: High strength bolts specified as
Snug-Tight (ST) need not be inspected for bolt tension. For high
strength bolts specified as Slip-Critical (SC), verify that 10% or a
minimum of 2 bolts per connection are tensioned in accordance with
the RCSC Specification.

Direct Tension Indicators: Observe all Direct Tension Indicators to
see if proper tightness was achieved.

2. Standard Bolted Connections: Testing Agency shall inspect the in-
stallation of A307 bolts to verify that 20% of all bolts or a minimum of
2 bolts per connection are installed properly and tightened to a
Snug-Tight (ST) condition.

F. Welded Connections:

1. Testing Agency shall be present during all welding operations. In
addition to visual inspection, all shop-welded connections will be
tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1 and this specification
using the following inspection procedures:
a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection (PT): ASTM E165.
b. Magnetic Particle Inspection (MT): ASTM E709; performed
on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of in-
complete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.
c. Ultrasonic Inspection (UT): ASTM E164.
d. Radiographic Inspection (RT): ASTM E94.

2. Visual Inspection of Welding: Testing Agency shall visually inspect
all shop and field welding of structural steel accordance with the
governing building code and AWS D1.1. Visual inspection of welds
shall include but not be limited to the following:
a. Verify: Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) sheet has
been provided and has been reviewed with each welder
making the weld, welder qualification and identification, fit-up
meets tolerances of WPS and mark joint prior to welding,
welding consumables are per the Contract Documents and
the WPS, amperage and voltage at the arc with hand-held
meters, meters on welding equipment are functioning and
accurate.

20/04/2013

b. Observe preheat and interpass temperatures, weld pass
sequence and size of weld bead.
c. Multi-pass shop and field welds shall be continuously
inspected.
d. Visually inspect welds of heavy structural sections, or plates
of 40mm minimum thickness, at least 72 hours after comple-
tion of welding for the presence of cracks.
e. Visually inspect areas where backing bars and welds tabs
are removed for conformance with the surface roughness
criteria of the specifications.
f. Verify that the effective throat thickness of flare groove welds
is consistently obtained when flush to bar or section. This ver-
ification shall be based on test sections where necessary.

3. Nondestructive Testing Requirements: Testing Agency shall perform
non-destructive testing of shop and field welding in accordance with
the project specifications, governing building code, and AWS D1.1.
Extent of non-destructive testing shall be as follows:
a. Complete Joint Penetration (CJP) welds: UT 100% CJP
welds greater than 8mm. MT 25% all CJP welds.
b. Partial Penetration Joint (PPJ) welds: UT 100% of PJP
welds greater than 8mm. UT 100% PJP in column splices.
c. Fillet Welds: Fillet welds of gusset plates to beams, columns
and base plates - MT 10% of the following fillet welds and re-
duce to 5% if no significant cracks are found in the first 50
tested: a) gusset plate fillet welds to beam and columns; b)
base plate fillet welds.
d. Column Web Material at Continuity Plate: MT the WF
column webs 3-inches above and below the weld termina-
tions at the first 50 continuity plates and doubler plates in-
stalled. Test shall be conducted when weld has cooled to
ambient temperature. If no web cracks are found, then no
more testing required. This test shall also be conducted for
all locations where the Contractor has welded into the no
weld zone shown on the Drawings for continuity plates.
e. Access holes at splices in Heavy Structural Sections MT or
PT 100%.

G. In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded shear studs will be tested and
inspected according to requirements in AWS D1.1 and the governing building
code for stud welding and as follows:

1. The type and capacity of the welding equipment shall be in accord-
ance with the manufacturer's recommendations and shall be
checked and approved.

2. At the beginning of each day's work, a minimum of 2 test stud welds
shall be made, with the equipment to be used, to metal which is the
same as the actual work piece. The test studs shall be subjected to
a 90-degree bend test by striking them with a heavy hammer. After
the above test, the weld section shall not exhibit any tearing or
cracking.

3. Bend tests will be performed if visual inspections reveal either a less-
than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear
connector.

20/04/2013

4. Tests will be conducted on additional shear studs if weld fracture
occurs on shear studs already tested, according to requirements in
AWS D1.1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-
bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other
embedments for compliance with requirements.

1. Prepare a certified survey of bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing
plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, an-
gles, and elevations.

B. Discrepancies: In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Owners
Representative in writing. Do not proceed with construction in the region of
the discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been resolved.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection
to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary
construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove
temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and brac-
ing are in place unless otherwise indicated.

1. The Schematic Design Drawings indicate the completed structure.
The Contractor is fully responsible for all temporary measures nec-
essary for erection, The Contractor must account for the effects of
construction methodology and sequencing on the design.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and ac-
cording to AISC 303 and AISC 360. Check accuracy after erection of each
section.

B. Dimensions shown on drawings are based on an assumed design tem-
perature of 70 degree F (28C). Fabrication and erection procedures
shall take into account the ambient temperature range at the time of the
respective operations.

C. Care shall be taken to protect work already installed from damages resulting
from structural steel erection.

D. Items installed before concrete is placed shall be properly braced to prevent
distortion by pressure of concrete. Watch and maintain bracing during con-
crete operations.

E. Base Bearing and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing
surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting

20/04/2013

plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. Remove any templates used for the
setting of anchor bolts.

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts
as required.

2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate.

3. Pretension anchor rods after supported members have been posi-
tioned and plumbed. If used, do not remove wedges or shims but, if
protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so
no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and
allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation in-
structions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

F. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303.

G. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or struc-
ture before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces
and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform
necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and
alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure.

2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of
erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in
service.

H. Splice members only where indicated.

I. Do not use thermal cutting during erection.

J. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream
holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. Where a hole is required to be
enlarged by more than 2.5mm ream to and use next larger bolt size.

K. Shear Studs: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of
shear studs. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear studs ac-
cording to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. Erection bolts for welded connection shall be tightened securely and left in
place, unless noted otherwise.

B. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Speci-
fication for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts" for type of bolt
and type of joint specified.

C. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.8 for tolerances,
appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods
used in correcting welding work.

20/04/2013

1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment,
adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on
surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Remove backing bars or weld tabs back gouge, and grind steel
smooth.

3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain
true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for
mill material.

4. Weld in manner to prevent warping or distortion of finished product.
Use jigs which will not restrain piece from moving during welding or
cooling after welding. Sequence weld passes at a joint to prevent
excessive heat build-up or cause shrinkage cracks to form.

5. Auxiliary Member Connections and Temporary Welds shall be per
AWS provided that preheating may be omitted on ASTM A36 steel
for single pass fillet welds with low hydrogen electrodes under the fol-
lowing conditions: Air temperature is 60 F (15C). or over, steel is
dry, and welds to structural base material are more than 1"
(25.4mm)away from corners or ends of plates.

6. Preheat and post-heat procedures for welded joints shall be utilized
to prevent rapid cooling of welds, particularly in cold weather. Pro-
cedures are Contractors responsibility.

7. Where structural steel members are to remain exposed in the fin-
ished work, welds exposed to view shall be uniformly made and
ground smooth to the acceptance of the Company Representative.
The acceptance criteria shall be tested and agreed using mock-ups
of architecturally sensitive connections. The Company Representa-
tive will specify the number and the location of mock-ups required.

D. Shear Studs: The shear studs shall be automatically end welded in ac-
cordance with AWS D1.1 and the manufacturers recommendations in
such a manner as to provide complete fusion between the end of the stud
and the plate.

1. There should be no porosity or evidence of lack of fusion between
the welded end of the stud and the plate.

2. Shear studs through metal deck shall be welded through the deck
within 1 day of laying the deck.

E. Bearing Pads: Install bearing pads in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Erection Tolerances: Unless otherwise noted, level and plumb individual
members of the structure within a tolerance of 1:500, but not to exceed 1/2"
(12.7mm) for full height of columns. Make exterior columns and columns ad-
jacent to elevator beams accurate within tolerance of 1:1000, but not to ex-
ceed 1/2" (12.7mm) for full column height. Make level and plumb based on the
mean operating temperature of the structure, allowing for the difference in
temperature at time of erection and the mean temperature of the structure
when completed and in service. Base measurements relating to tolerances
on the theoretical centerline of the columns.

20/04/2013

1. Columns: Gaps exceeding 1/8 inch (3mm) between milled ends not
permitted. Shim acceptable gaps with non-tapered mild steel shim
stock.

B. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be tested and inspected accord-
ing to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490
Bolts."

1. The Inspector shall observe all Direct Tension Indicators to see if
proper tightness is achieved.

C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to
AWS D1.1, the governing building code, by the Testing Agency.

D. Defective Work:

1. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate
does not comply with the Contract Documents. Work deemed defec-
tive will be removed from the site at the Contractors expense.

2. Any special tests not specifically covered by this specification that
are proposed by the Contractor as a result of failure to comply with
this Section shall be at the Contractors expense. The Contractor
shall be responsible for any consequential costs or delays.

3. The results of those tests will be accepted, at the discretion of the
Architect, as proof of adequate materials or workmanship.

3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Site connections including surfaces to be field welded, damage caused by or
during transportation, handling, erection or any other cause should be pro-
tected and/or made good as per the original specification including the origi-
nal surface preparation. The Contractor can submit for approval proposals to
the company representative for surface preparation in accordance with the
following specifications and standards for areas limited to repair and site con-
nections where the original shop surface preparation specification can be
shown not to be achieved. Approval must be sought and granted prior to the
works be executed on site:
1) SSPC-SP1 Solvent Cleaning
2) SSPC-SP2 Hand Tool Cleaning

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing
and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780

C. Repair of Openings: For all members exposed to view in the final structure,
close all lifting holes, access openings, etc. in such a manner that no visual
evidence of the opening remains.

END OF SECTION 051200

Multi-Purpose Sports Hall & Athletics
Stadium

033000 Cast-in-place Concrete Specification
KASC-SA SPH-SPC-2911
Issue 1 | 20-March 2013


20/03/2013
Section 033000 / 1 Cast-in-place Concrete

Contents

Contents .................................................................................................................. 1

PART 1 - GENERAL ............................................................................................ 1
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ...................................................... 1
1.2 SUMMARY.............................................................................. 1
1.3 DEFINITIONS ......................................................................... 1
1.4 SUBMITTALS ......................................................................... 1
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE......................................................... 5
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ......................... 7

PART 2 - PRODUCTS .......................................................................................... 8
2.1 MANUFACTURERS ................................................................ 8
2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS ................................................ 8
2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT.................................................... 10
2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES ....................................10
2.5 REINFORCEMENT FABRICATION......................................11
2.6 CONCRETE MATERIALS ....................................................12
2.7 ADMIXTURES .......................................................................13
2.8 WATERSTOPS .......................................................................14
2.9 VAPOR RETARDERS ...........................................................14
2.10 CURING MATERIALS .......................................................... 15
2.11 RELATED MATERIALS ....................................................... 15
2.12 MORTARS AND GROUTS ................................................... 16
2.13 REPAIR MATERIALS ........................................................... 17
2.14 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL .................................. 18
2.15 CONCRETE MIXTURES........................................................18
2.16 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT......................................21
2.17 CONCRETE MIXING ............................................................ 21

PART 3 - EXECUTION ...................................................................................... 21
3.1 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING ........................................ 21
3.2 PREPARATION...................................................................... 21
3.3 FORMWORK............................................................................22
3.4 EARTH FORMS ..................................................................... 23
3.5 EMBEDDED ITEMS .............................................................. 23
3.6 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS ................................. 24
3.7 SHORES AND RESHORES.....................................................24
3.8 VAPOR RETARDERS ........................................................... 25
3.9 STEEL REINFORCEMENT................................................... ..25
3.10 JOINTS .................................................................................... 27
3.11 WATERSTOPS ...................................................................... ..28
3.12 CONCRETE PLACEMENT ....................................... ........... 28

20/03/2013

3.13 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES ..................................... 30
3.14 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS.......................................31
3.15 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS ............................ 33
3.16 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING ....................... 33
3.17 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS ......................................... 34
3.18 JOINT FILLING...................................................................... 34
3.19 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS........................................35
3.20 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .............................................. 36

20/03/2013

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Sup-
plementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforce-
ment, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes,
for the following:

1. Substructure.
2. Slabs-on-grade.
3. Superstructure.
4. Concrete toppings.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 03 Section "Architectural Concrete" for general building
applications of specially finished formed concrete.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with silica
fume; subject to compliance with requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General:

1. Review of submittals is of a general nature only, and the responsibility for
conformance with intent of drawings shall remain with the Contractor. Re-
view does not imply or state that the Contractor has correctly interpreted
the construction documents.
2. All submissions shall be in accordance with the submission schedule
developed and agreed between the Company Representative and Con-
tractor at the commencement of the project. Submission shall include
dates of order and delivery of materials to the shop and the site.
3. Shop drawing schedule shall allow adequate time for reviews.
Reinforcing steel shall not be fabricated or placed before the shop
drawings have been reviewed by the Company Representative and
returned.
4. Product Data: Submit
a. Complete description of proposed curing methods.

5. Shop Drawings: Submit complete Shop Drawings, including but not
necessarily limited to:
a. Reinforcing steel cutting, bending and placement schedule.
b. Location of all openings, depressions, trenches, sleeves, inserts
and other items affecting the reinforcement and placing of the
concrete.

20/03/2013

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including ICC-ES for
mechanical couplers.

C. Design Mixtures: Two copies of each concrete mix design to be used on the
project shall be submitted for review and approval to an Aramco approved Test-
ing Agency and Company Representative prior to concrete being delivered to
site by four weeks. Submit proposed mix designs for each class of concrete on
the Mix Design submittal form included at the end of this specification.
Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project
conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

1. For each concrete mixture, the following information shall be included:
where the mix is to be used, all materials and admixtures including their
source and proportions in the mix; Water content, water-to-cement ratio,
slump, and aggregate grading; whether the mixture is appropriate for
pumping; and total chloride content.
2. Provide shrinkage test results for mixes with shrinkage criteria showing
that mix meets performance criteria. The mix design number must match
with the mix design number shown on the test data.
3. Indicate compressive strength and method used to determine strength.
The compressive strength of the concrete shall be proportioned per ACI.
Include all calculations and tests required by ACI 318 Section 5.3 and
5.4. Laboratory test data must be submitted along calculations that show
with each mix design meets the strength requirement. Mix design
number must match the mix design number shown on the test data. In-
clude all test results or past history back up data specific as part of the
submittal. Test results within the past two years shall be used to indicate
performance in accordance with past history.
4. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at
Project site.

Each mix shall be stamped and signed by a registered design
professional.
5. Indicate density of aggregate or equilibrium density, for lightweight
concrete.

D. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings in accordance with ACI
SP 66 that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Direct copies of the con-
tract documents are not acceptable as a submission from the Contractor.

1. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup
spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, me-
chanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for
concrete reinforcement. Include any welding to be done.
2. Shop drawings shall make it clear where each bar is located. Beams,
grade beams and walls shall be shown in elevation. On elevations show
locations of sleeves and penetrations.
3. Check architectural, structural, mechanical, and electrical and other
contract documents for anchor bolt schedules and locations, anchors,
inserts, conduits, sleeves, and any other items which are required to be
cast in concrete, and make necessary provisions as required so that re-
inforcing steel will not interfere with the placement of such embedded
items.
4. Show all areas of congestion. Identify where reinforcing steel will in-
terfere with the placement of embedded items such as anchor bolts,
anchors, inserts, conduits, sleeves and any other items which are re-
quired to be cast in concrete.

20/03/2013

E. Submit schedule of concrete placement operations before commencing Work.

F. Show on one or more plans and/or elevations, locations of construction, con-
traction and expansion of joints, slab edges, curbs, equipment pads, depres-
sions, sleeves and openings. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to position
the construction joints and control the pour size so as not to cause any detri-
mental impact on the permanent works.

G. Formwork: Prepared by or under the supervision of a registered design
professional detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.

1. Design Criteria:
a. Design of concrete formwork, shoring, reshoring and bracing shall
be the sole responsibility of the Contractor and shall conform to
Code requirements and shall be in accordance with the recom-
mendations of ACI 347.
b. Provide forms complete and of such strength and adequately
braced so as to prevent any spreading, shifting or settling when
concrete is placed to ensure finished concrete surfaces of the
required tolerances.
c. Forms shall be tight to prevent leakage or washing out of cement
mortar from concrete.
d. Bolts, rods, and other devices when used for internal ties and
spreaders shall be of such construction that when the forms are
removed, no metal shall be within 25.mm of the concrete surfaces.

2. Shop Drawing Requirements:
a. Shop Drawings shall show location and layout of construction
joints, reveals, slab edges, form joints, sleeves, openings, tex-
tures, locations of tie holes or plugs, location of embedded items
and blockouts, and all related details affecting Architectural quali-
ty.
b. Shop Drawings will show dimensioned location to the face of
formwork for walls, beams, columns, slab edges, slab de-
pressions, etc.
c. Formwork details affecting Architectural finish quality shall be
reviewed by the Company Representative.
d. Indicate where formwork release agent will be used, as applicable.
e. Where a mock-up is required, submit shop drawings of the mock-
up.

H. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping
formwork, shoring removal, and installing and removing reshoring. Show how
forces will be transferred to the reshores. Show that procedures will not cause
damage to the structure nor result in additional permanent deflections. Provide
calculations by a registered design professional.

I. Welding certificates.

J. Welding Procedures for all reinforcement welding.

K. Mill Test Reports: Submit steel producer's certificates of mill analysis for each
heat or melt of reinforcing steel, including steel source, description, heat num-
ber, yield point, ultimate tensile strength, elongation percent, bend test and the
chemical composition of each heat as determined by ladle analysis, before de-
livery of steel to site. Where steel is required to be welded, mill reports shall be
used to help verify the weldability of the steel.

20/03/2013

L. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer and testing agency. Submit
qualification of Concrete Foreman, showing 5 years experience with this type of
concrete installation.

M. Material Test Reports: For the following, from an Aramco approved testing
agency, indicating compliance with requirements:

1. Normal weight aggregate (per ASTM C33). Include service record data
indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali
aggregate reactivity. Include evaluation of reactivity and the following: a.
Abrasion Resistance: ASTM C131; Los Angeles Machine.
b. Cleanness Value: Test Method NO. C 227; coarse aggregate only.
c. Fineness: ASTM C117.
d. Organic Impurities: ASTM C40.
e. Potential Reactivity: ASTM C289.
f. Sand Equivalent: Test Method No. C 217.
g. Sieve Analysis: ASTM C136.
h. Soundness: ASTM C88.

N. Product Test Reports and Certificates: For each of the following, signed by
manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials, per ASTM C150.
2. Admixtures. Where more than one admixture is used, include certifi-
cation that admixtures are compatible. Per ASTM C494 for each type
used; include chloride ion content.
3. Form materials and form-release agents.
4. Steel reinforcement and accessories.
5. Welding Electrodes
6. Waterstops.
7. Curing compounds.
8. Floor and slab treatments.
9. Non-shrink grout, per ASTM C1107 Grade B.
10. Bonding agents.
11. Vapor retarders.
12. Semirigid joint filler.
13. Joint-filler strips.
14. Post-installed concrete anchors.
15. Repair materials.

O. Submit a complete description of the system proposed for meeting the floor slab
flatwork tolerances. Submit survey data from a minimum of two previous slab in-
stallations to demonstrate capability to satisfy specified tolerances.

P. Field quality-control test and inspection reports.

Q. Submit an affidavit identifying cementitious material used, including manufactur-
er's lot number, date of shipment by manufacturer, date of receipt by the con-
crete supplier, place of storage and date of use. If such information is
not available, a sample of cementitious material used on the Project shall be
taken for each day's pour and shall be tested as directed by the Company
Representative at no additional cost.

R. Transit-Mix Delivery Slips

1. Keep record at the Site showing time and place of each pour of concrete,
together with transit mix delivery slip certifying contents of the pour per
ASTM C94. Include the time water was added to dry mix.

20/03/2013

2. Make the record available for inspection at the Site and to the Company
Representative for his review upon request.
3. Upon completion of this portion of the Work, deliver the record and the
delivery slips to the Company Representative.

S. Minutes of preinstallation conference.


A. Standards: Comply with the following:.

1. The 2009 International Building Code of the International Code Council
(ICC) in its entirety, with all amendments and supplements thereto except
where provisions of the IBC are specifically varied by the Saudi Building
Code (SBC) unless advised otherwise by the Company Representative.
2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and
Materials."
3. ACI 211.1 Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavy
weight, and Mass Concrete
4. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5.
5. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
6. ACI SP-66, Detailing Manual
7. ASTM C39 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of
Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
8. ASTM C94-09 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
9. ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement
10. ASTM C494 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for
Concrete
11. ASTM C618 Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or
Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete
12. ASTM A767 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel
Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
13. ASTM C1240 Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in
Cementitious Mixtures
14. American Welding Society (AWS) D1.4, Structural Welding Code
Reinforcing Steel
15. ASTM C 595 Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements
16. ASTM C 1602M Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of
Hydraulic Cement Concrete
17. ASTM C 1157 Performance Specification for Hydraulic Cement
18. ACI 305R Hot Weather Concreting
19. ACI 355.2 Qualification of Post-Installed Mechanical Anchors in Concrete
and Commentary
20. ACI 224 Control of Cracking in Concrete Structures
21. ACI 224.3R Joints in Concrete Construction
22. ACI 237R Self Consolidating Concrete
23. SAER Concrete Repair Manual
24. ACI 504R Guide to Joint Sealants in Concrete Structures

B. Installer Qualifications: Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork
Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete
Flatwork Technician.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed
concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for
production facilities and equipment.

20/03/2013

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent approved agency qualified
according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as doc-
umented according to ASTM E 548.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be carried out by certified special
inspectors or approved agencies

E. Approved Testing Agency: The Contactor shall engage an independent ap-
proved agency to perform tests and prepare test reports. The selection of the
independent approved agency shall be subject to the approval of the Company
Representative. The Company Representative may, at his discretion, call for
tests tor inspections to be verified by separate approved agency.

F. Contractors Quality Control Plan: Quality Control includes the functions per-
formed by the Contractor to ensure that the material and workmanship of con-
crete construction meets the project specifications and applicable standards.
The Contractor shall submit a Quality Control Plan that addresses all inspec-
tion issues, including testing and inspection per ACI. The verification testing
and inspection carried out by the approved Testing Agency does not relieve
the contractor of the responsibility for conducting their own quality con-
trol/inspection program to ensure the requirements of the Contract Documents
have been met. The Contractors Quality Control Plan shall be reviewed and
approved by the Company Representative.

G. Quality Control Inspector Qualifications: Along with Quality Control Plan,
Contractor shall submit written qualifications for all inspectors to be assigned
Quality Control functions for concrete work.

H. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the
same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one
source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer.

I. Mechanical Bar Couplers shall have a current ICC-ES Evaluation Report that
indicates compliance with requirements of these specifications.

J. Unidentifiable Reinforcing Steel: Tested by an approved testing agency; under
the responsibility of the Contractor:

1. Test reinforcing delivered to site which cannot be properly identified by
heat number and mill mark for compliance with ASTM A615 as follows:
2. 25mm Bar and Smaller: One tensile test and one bend test of each size
per 7-1/2 tonnes or portion thereof.
3. 32mm Bar and Larger: One tensile test of each size per 10 tonnes, or
portion thereof.

K. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4, "Structural
Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."

1. Welders whose work fails to pass inspection shall be requalified before
performing further welding.
2. Firm specializing in furnishing and installing reinforcement shall have a
minimum of 5 years experience on projects with requirements similar to
this project and shall have sufficient production capacity.
3. All welding shall be performed by operators who are qualified for the
types of welds used. Each operator shall have been qualified within the
preceding one year as prescribed by AWS. Welder qualification shall
include passing the Charpy tests when specified for the electrode.
4. Require welders to retake the qualification test at no additional cost if, as
determined by the Company Representative, there is a reasonable doubt

20/03/2013

as to the proficiency of the welder. If the welder does not requalify, they
shall not perform any welding on the project.

L. Concrete Testing Service: Engage an independent approved testing agency to
perform material evaluation tests and to test concrete mixtures. When mixes,
are proportioned by trial batch method, engage a Laboratory conforming to
ASTM E329 and under direction of a registered design professional.

M. Prefabrication and Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project
site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management
and Coordination."

1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and
examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require
representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place con-
crete to attend, including the following:
a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Independent approved testing agency responsible for concrete
design mixtures.
c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.
d. Concrete subcontractor.

2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures
for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-
weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contrac-
tion and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, semirigid joint fillers, forms
and form removal limitations, shoring and reshoring procedures, vapor-
retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation toler-
ances, steel reinforcement installation, floor and slab flatness and level-
ness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.


A. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and re-
placements necessary to the approval of the Company Representative and at
no additional cost to SAUDI ARAMCO.

B. Steel Reinforcement:

1. Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and
damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement. Manufacture,
fabrication, handling, placement and storage of reinforcement shall be in
accordance with chapter 7 of ACI 318. Handling and fabrication of the
Epoxy coated reinforcement shall be in accordance with ASTM A775
Appendix, and Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI). The extent of
the damage and repair of the coating shall be in accordance with 09-
SAMSS-106.
2. Deliver reinforcing to Site properly bundled, tagged and marked with mill
identification for cross referencing the mill certificates. Use tags that in-
dicate bar size, lengths and marks corresponding to markings shown on
shop drawings. Segregate so as to maintain identification after bundles
are broken.
3. Store reinforcement in a manner that will prevent excessive rusting or
fouling with/ grease, oil, dirt, and other bond weakening materials.
4. Do not use damaged, reworked, or deteriorated material.

C. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight,
dirt, oil, and other contaminants.

20/03/2013

D. Formwork: Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with
seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use.

E. Concrete Materials:

1. Protect cement from moisture and rotate stock to ensure fresh materials.
2. Protect aggregates as necessary to maintain saturated condition when
batched.
3. Storage methods should comply with ACI 301 4.1.4.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
products specified. The Contractor may propose alternatives with
equivalent quality and performance to products specified and may use
such products, subject to approval by Company Representative.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
products specified.
3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.
4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide con-
tinuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable
sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other agreed panel materials.
2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying
with DOC PS 1, and as follows:
a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better.
b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent
treated and edge sealed.
c. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.
d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; and edge sealed. Mill oil
not allowed.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another ap-
proved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for
tight fit.

C. For exposed surfaces not otherwise specified use Special exterior Type Doug-
las Fir, Grade AB plywood, conforming to NBS PS-1, minimum 19 mm. thick
and constructed so that finished concrete will be straight, smooth, dense, free
from honeycombs, bulges, or depressions. Keep joints between plywood sec-
tions to a minimum and make tight and strongly backed so that adjoining edg-
es remain flush and true.

20/03/2013

D. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber- re-
inforced plastic that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities
not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient
wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.

E. Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to
resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation. For areas ex-
posed to view, use new forms or specially selected forms.

F. Foam Filler or High Density Styrofoam Fill: Expanded polystyrene foam, ASTM
C578, Type IX, 1.9 pounds per cubic foot density.
G. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 20mm x 20mm, minimum.
H. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form
removal.

I. Form Gaskets (for sealing form panel joints) Gaskets shall be closed cell, com-
pletely skinned, foam rubber or neoprene, with pressure sensitive paperbacked
adhesive on surfaces to be bonded to forms. Gaskets shall be of sufficient
thickness, widths and compressibility for specific use.

J. Form Sealer (Wood Forms): All form sealers shall be of a type which will not
harmfully affect the appearance and/or utility of the concrete surface or the
application of sealers, paint, vinyl fabric or any other finishes. In addition, form
sealer shall prevent the development of bond or adhesion to concrete.

K. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not
bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair sub-
sequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing
materials.
2. Form release agents shall have a VOC content of 350 grams/liter or less.

L. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber- rein-
forced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on
forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 25mm to the
plane of exposed concrete surface.
2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 25mm in
diameter in concrete surface and permit neat and solid patching at every
hole.
3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive
dampproofing or waterproofing.

M. Expansion Joint Filler:

1. Fiber Type: Preformed asphalt impregnated fiber, ASTM D1751,12mm -
25mm thick unless otherwise noted.
2. Cork Type: Preformed cork expansion joint, ASTM D1752. Type II,12mm
thick unless otherwise noted.

N. Expansion Joint Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Class 2 5; two part
polyurethane traffic grade sealant, gray color.

1. Horizontal Joints: Pourable, Grade P, Use T.
2. Vertical Joints: Nonsag, Grade NS, Use NT.

20/03/2013

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars:

1. ASTM A615, Grade 60, hot rolled high tensile, deformed, unless noted
otherwise conforming to SASO SSA2.
2. ASTM A706M, Grade 60, hot rolled, high tensile, deformed steel, where
bars are welded.

Note : In terms of purchase on the situation , ASTM A615, Grade 60, hot
rolled high tensile, deformed bar could be substituted with equivalent
grade, It should be confirmed by the contractor in compliance with Ar-
amco standard.

B. For Wall Boundary Elements: Comply with low alloy steel, ASTM A706, Grade
60. Billet steel A615 Grade 60 complying with IBC Section 1908.1.5 may be
used in lieu of A706.

C. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60 deformed bars,
ASTM A775, epoxy coated, with less than 2 percent damaged coating in each
300mm bar length, conforming to 09-SAMSS-106 Fusion Bonded Epoxy.
D. Headed Bar Reinforcement: ASTM A970.
E. Stainless-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A955, Grade 60, Type, deformed.

F. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M, fabricated from ASTM A615, Grade 60
deformed bars, assembled with clips.

G. Tie Wire: American Wire 16 gauge or heavier black annealed wire.

H. Spiral Reinforcement: Use Plain-Steel Wire if specified as wire or ASTM A615
Grade 60 if specified by bar size.

I. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A82, as drawn.
J. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A496.
K. Epoxy-Coated Wire: ASTM A884, Class A, Type 1 coated, as-drawn, plain
steel wire, with less than 2 percent damaged coating in each 300mm wire
length.

L. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A185, plain, fabricated from
as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

M. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A497, flat sheet.

N. Galvanized-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A185, plain, fabricated
from galvanized steel wire into flat sheets.

O. Epoxy-Coated Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A884, Class A coated,
Type 1, deformed steel.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut bars true to
length with ends square and free of burrs.

B. Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, plain-steel bars,

20/03/2013

ASTM A775 epoxy coated.

C. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with
epoxy coating on reinforcement and complying with ASTM A775.

D. Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A780, zinc-based solder, paint containing zinc
dust, or sprayed zinc.

E. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, support-
ing, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place.
Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, or precast concrete according to
CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than
concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view or where legs of wire bar supports
contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI
Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports, unless noted otherwise.
2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-
polymer-coated wire bar supports.
3. For zinc-coated reinforcement, use galvanized wire or dielectric-polymer-
coated wire bar supports.
4. Where supports are placed against ground or atop vapor barrier use of
PVC Schedule 80 pipe as spacer is permitted. PVC pipe shall be
notched at the bottom to allow the ingress of concrete.
5. At Architectural Concrete and surfaces exposed to weather; CRSI Class
1 plastic protected.
6. ISO approved fiber reinforced cement.

F. Mechanical Bar Couplers: Provide coupler capable of achieving Type 1- splice,
unless otherwise noted on Drawings.

1. Type 1: ICC-ES approved; capable of developing 125% of specified
minimum yield strength of bar in tension or compression.
2. Type 2: ICC-ES approved; capable of developing the lesser of 95% of
the ultimate tensile strength or 160% of the specified minimum yield
strength of the bar in tension or compression.

G. Welding Electrodes: As required in AWS D1.4. As a minimum, use E90XX
electrodes.

H. Deformed Bar Anchors: Nelson, flux filled deformed bar anchors, type D2L, as
manufactured by Nelson Stud Welding Division of TRW or approved equal.

2.5 REINFORCEMENT FABRICATION

A. Fabricate reinforcing in accordance with ACI 301, 315 or CRSI "Manual of
Standard Practice."
B. Bending:
1. Do not bend or kink reinforcing except as shown on the Drawings.
2. Minimum bend diameters and hook extensions as shown on the
drawings or per ACI.
3. In case of fabrication errors do not rebend or straighten reinforcement in
a manner that will injure or weaken the material.
4. Reinforcing bars are to be bent cold, do not preheat, unless approved by
5. Do not rebend reinforcement that has previously been bent within
150mm of new bend except as allowed in section 3.3.2.8 of ACI 301.

20/03/2013

C. Spirals: Provide a minimum of 1-1/2 finishing turns top and bottom.
D. Unacceptable Materials: Reinforcement with any of the following defects shall
not be permitted in the Work and will be replaced without cost:

1. Bar lengths, depths and bends exceeding specified fabrication
tolerances.
2. Bend or kinks not shown on the Drawings or final shop drawings.
3. Bars with reduced cross-section due to rusting or other cause.
4. Bars with dirt, mud, grease or form release agent.

2.6 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same
type, brand, and source, throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement:
a. ASTM C150, Type I, unless noted otherwise
b. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type V.

2. Supplement Portland Cement with the following Supplementary
Cementitious Materials (SCM):

a. Silica Fume: ASTM C1240, amorphous silica.

3. Cementitious material used shall have at least 2 years of use with
proposed aggregates without detrimental reaction.
4. Alkali content shall not exceed 0.6% when tested in accordance with
ASTM C114.
5. The temperature of cement delivered to the plant shall not exceed 65C

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33, Class 3S for aggregate in concrete
exposed to weather, Class 3N for aggregate in concrete protected from
weather, coarse aggregate or better, graded. All aggregates shall conform to
09SAMSS 088. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented
service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applica-
tions and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious mate-
rials].

1. Coarse Aggregate:
a. Maximum Size: 25mm nominal, unless noted otherwise.
b. Minimum Specific Gravity: 2.65.
c. Aggregate shall contain no thin or elongated pieces. Any piece
having a major dimension more than 2-1/2 times the average
thickness shall be considered thin or elongated.
d. If shrinkage controlled concrete, Coarse Aggregate shall be
crushed limestone, granite, or accepted equal.
e. The maximum size used in a particular location shall be consistent
with the form and dimensions of the section being placed, with the
location and spacing of the reinforcing steel and with the method
of vibration. The aggregate sizes shall be such as will produce
dense, uniform concrete, free of rock pockets, honeycombs, or
other irregularities.
f. Combined aggregate gradation for slabs and other designated
concrete shall be 8% to 18% for large top size aggregates 25mm
38mm) or 8% - 22% for smaller top size aggregates (25mm
19mm) retained on each sieve below the top size and above the
No. 100.

2. Fine Aggregate: Uniformly graded, clean sand, free from excessive

20/03/2013

fines, organic materials or other deleterious materials. Free of materials
with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C. Water: ASTM C94 including the optional chemical tests, clean, free from
deleterious matter and potable. Water shall also meet the requirements of
ASTM C 1602M Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of
Hydraulic Cement Concrete

2.7 ADMIXTURES

A. General: Only if accepted by the Company Representative in accordance with
ACI 318/318R 3.6 if the admixtures comply with requirements of ASTM C494.
Where more than one is used, admixtures shall be compatible. Use of admix-
tures shall be consistent throughout Work.

1. Where specified herein do not use other admixtures without the written
acceptance of the Company Representative.
2. Prohibited Admixtures: Admixtures containing more than 0.05 percent
chloride ions, fluorides, sulphites, thiocyanates, and/or nitrates are not
permitted. Do not use admixtures that will negatively impact the visual
finish of concrete exposed to view.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be
compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble
chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use
calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494, Type B.
2. High-Range, Water-Reducing (Superplasticizers) Admixture:
ASTM C494, Type F. Products:
a. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; "WRDA 19 or
Daracem 100"
b. Sika Corporation; "Sikament 300"
c. BASF Construction Products; Rheobuild 1000
d. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Eucon 37, 1037 or Plastol 5000

3. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494,
Type G.
4. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C1017, Type II.
5. Shrinkage reducing admixtures: Not yet covered by ASTM
6. Viscosity modifying admixtures for self-compacting concrete: ASTM
C494 type S.
7. Non-Chloride, Non-Corrosive Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494, Type
C or E. Manufacturer must have long-term non-corrosive test data from
an independent testing laboratory (of at least a years duration) using an
acceptable accelerated corrosion test method. Products:
a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80, 90, or NCA

C. Color Pigment: ASTM C979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored wa-
ter-reducing admixtures; color stable, free of carbon black, nonfading, and
resistant to lime and other alkalis.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Bayer Corporation.
b. ChemMasters.
c. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc.; a Dayton Superior
Company.
d. Davis Colors.
e. Elementis Pigments, Inc.
f. Hoover Color Corporation.
g. Lambert Corporation.

20/03/2013

h. Scofield, L. M. Company.
i. Solomon Colors.

2. Color: As selected by Company Representative from manufacturer's full
range.

2.8 WATERSTOPS

A. Flexible Rubber Waterstops: CE CRD-C 513,for embedding in concrete to
prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricated corners, inter-
sections, and directional changes.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Greenstreak.
b. Progress Unlimited, Inc.
c. Williams Products, Inc.
d. Fosroc
e. Adeka
f. Grace

2. Profile: Flat, dumbbell with center bulb [Flat, dumbbell without center
bulb] [Ribbed with center bulb] [Ribbed without center bulb].
3. Dimensions: 4 inches (101.6mm) by 3/16 inch (4.8mm) thick ; 100mm by
5mm nontapered.

B. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or
trapezoidal strip, butyl rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic
polymers, for adhesive bonding to concrete 20mm by 25mm.

1. [Available ] Products:
a. Colloid Environmental Technologies Company; Volclay Waterstop-
RX.
b. Concrete Sealants Inc.; Conseal CS-231.
c. Greenstreak; Swellstop.
d. Henry Company, Sealants Division; Hydro-Flex.
e. JP Specialties, Inc.; Earthshield Type 20.
f. Progress Unlimited, Inc.; Superstop.
g. TCMiraDRI; Mirastop.
h. Grace Adcor ES

2.9 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A, not less than 10 mils (0.25mm)
thickness. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure- sensi-
tive tape. Plastic Vapor Retarder shall have a water-vapor transmission
rate no greater than .012 perms (grain/h xft2 in x Hg) when tested in
accordance with ASTM E96.

1. [Available ]Products:
a. Alumiseal Corporation; Zero Perm Vapor Barrier.
b. Fortifiber Corporation; Moistop Ultra A.
c. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block [15] [10].
d. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn Type-[65G] [105].
e. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; Plasmatic Core.
f. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap, 15 mils (0.38mm).

B. Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel;
ASTM D 448, Size 57, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (38.1mm) sieve
and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.

20/03/2013

C. Fine-Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed grav-
el, and manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent
passing a 3/8-inch (9.5mm) sieve, 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 sieve,
and at least 5 percent passing No. 200 sieve; complying with deleterious sub-
stance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates.

2.10 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured
for application to fresh concrete.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or
kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (0.305 kg/m) when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C171, polyethylene film, fiber reinforced
asphaltic vapor barrier building paper, or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

1. Provide in a thickness of 42 mils (1.07mm); standard weight of 53
lbs./1000 ft2 (26kg/m); tensile strength (machine direction) of 36 lbs./in
(6.3N/m).; and puncture resistance of 70 lbs (3.12N)

D. Water: Potable.

E. Curing compounds shall have a VOC limit of 200 g/l.

F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309,
Type 1, Class B, dissipating. Sodium silicate compounds are prohibited.

G. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309,
Type 1, Class B, nondissipating[, certified by curing compound manufacturer to
not interfere with bonding of floor covering]. Sodium silicate compounds are
prohibited.

H. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type
1, Class B, 18 to 25 percent solids, nondissipating[, certified by curing com-
pound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor covering]. Sodium sili-
cate compounds are prohibited.

I. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound:
ASTM C1315, Type 1, Class A. Sodium silicate compounds are prohibited.

J. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound:
ASTM C1315, Type 1, Class A. Sodium silicate compounds are prohibited.

2.11 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D1751, asphalt-saturated
cellulosic fiber or ASTM D1752, cork or self-expanding cork or ASTM D1752,
gray sponge rubber.

B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy
resin with a Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 per ASTM D2240.

C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or
styrene butadiene.

20/03/2013

D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of
humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application
temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows:

1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed
concrete to hardened concrete.

E. Post-Installed Concrete Anchors All post installed anchor bolts shall satisfy ACI-
318 appendix D. All post installed anchors shall be qualified in accordance with
ACI 355.2 Qualification of Post Installed Mechanical Anchors in Concrete and
Commentary. All anchors shall be installed by an approved vendor contractor.

F. Expansion Anchors: Kwik Bolt III by Hilti Inc, Trubolt Wedge by ITW
Ramset/Red Head, Power-Stud by Powers-Rawl, or approved equal.

1. Epoxy Dowels / Epoxy Anchors: HIT HY 150 by Hilti, Inc., CIA-Gel 7000
by Covert Operations, SET by Simpson Strong Tie, Power-Fast by
Powers-Rawl, or equal.
2. Grouted Dowels / Grouted Anchors: High strength non-shrink grout to
anchor reinforcing steel or threaded rods in concrete shall be Masterflow
928 grout as manufactured by Master Builders, Sika Grout 212 as
manufactured by Sika Corporation, or equal.
3.

F. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 26 gauge, galvanized steel sheet.
Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete
or debris. Galvanized material is only suitable for internal controlled environ-
ments.

G. Joint Fillers. Use joint fillers appropriate for coastal environments.

H. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet, not less than 22 gauge,
with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent
intrusion of concrete or debris. Galvanized material is only suitable for internal
controlled environments.

2.12 MORTARS AND GROUTS

A. Bonding Grout: Approximately 1 part Portland cement to 1 part fine sand pass-
ing a no 30 sieve and a 50/50 mixture of approved bonding admixture and wa-
ter, mixed to a consistency of thick paint and not exceeding the w/cm of the
concrete to be bonded.

B. Patching Mortar for exposed concrete shall be made of the same material and
of approximately the same proportions as used for concrete, except that coarse
aggregate shall be omitted and mortar shall consist of not more than 1 part
Portland cement to 2-1/2 parts damp loose sand by volume.

1. Combine white and gray Portland cement as necessary to match color
specified by Architect. Use no more mixing water than necessary for
handling and placing.
2. Mix patching mortar in advance and allow to stand with frequent mixing
with trowel without adding water until it has reached the stiffest con-
sistency that will permit placing.

C. High Flow Grout:

1. Where high fluidity and/or increased placing time is required, use high
flow low viscosity grout.

20/03/2013

2. ASTM C1107, Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-
Cement Grout (Non-Shrink).
3. When placed at a fluid consistency there shall be at least 95% bearing
under an 450mm by 900mm base plate.
4. Hi-Flow Grout manufactured by The Euclid Chemical Company or
Masterflow 928 manufactured by BASF Construction Products.

D. Epoxy grout for anchor reinforcing steel or threaded rods in concrete shall be
Masterflow MP as manufactured by BASF Construction Products, or Sikadur 32
Hi-Mod as manufactured by Sika Corporation, or Epoxy 452 or E3G by Euclid
Chemical Company.

E. Cementitious grout for anchor reinforcing steel or threaded rods in concrete
shall be Masterflow 928 grout as manufactured by BASF Construction Products
or Sika Grout 212 as manufactured by Sika Corporation, Hi-Flow grout by
Euclid Chemical Company.

F. Drypack Mortar for Form Holes at Non-Architectural Grade Surfaces: Com-
posed of 1 part Portland cement and 2 parts of fine aggregate and water.
Match color of adjacent surfaces.

2.13 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. High Strength Flowing Repair Mortar: For forming and pouring structural
members, or large horizontal repairs, provide the flowable one-part, high
strength microsilica modified repair mortar with 10mm aggregate. The product
shall achieve 9000 psi @ 28-days at a 225mm slump.

B. Concrete Patching Mortar:

1. Horizontal repairs, ASTM C1059, Type II. [Available] Products:
a. Euclid Chemical Co.; Euco Thin Coat, Concrete Coat
b. Sika Chemical Corp.; Sikatop 121 or 122

2. Vertical or Overhead repairs, ASTM C1059, Type II. [Available]
Products:
a. Euclid Chemical Co.; Verticoat
b. Sika Chemical Corp.; Sikatop 123
c. Master Builders; Emaco R300, 310 or R350

C. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product
that can be applied in thicknesses from 3mm and that can be feathered at
edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended
hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C219.
2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for
substrate, conditions, and application.
3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 3mm to 6mm or coarse sand as
recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 35MPa at 28 days when tested
according to ASTM C109.
5. Bond Strength: Not less than 7MPa at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C1042.
6. [Available] Products:
a. Euclid Chemical Co.; Flo-Top
b. Master Builders; UnderLayment 110

20/03/2013

D. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product
that can be applied in thicknesses from 3mm and that can be feathered at
edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C150, Portland Cement Primer: Product of
topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and
application.
2. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 3mm to 6mm or coarse sand as
recommended by topping manufacturer.
3. Compressive Strength: Not less than 35MPa at 28 days when tested
according to ASTM C109.
4. Products:
a. Euclid Chemical Co.; Thin Top SL
b. Master Builders; Topping 112

5. Product shall exhibit the following properties: Chaplin Abrasion Test
0.0079-inches (0.2mm) maximum at 28 days.

2.14 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned
on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to
ACI 301.

1. Procurement of concrete mix design is responsibility of Contractor.
2. Use a qualified independent approved agency for preparing and reporting
proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent
by weight of cement.

C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use high-range water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for
placement and workability.
2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high
temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-
use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be
watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below
0.45.

D. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manu-
facturer's written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color con-
sistent with agreed mockup.

E. Prepare design mixtures for large sections (greater than 0.5m minimum dimen-
sion)to ensure that temperature during hydration doeas not exceed 650C. A
higher temperature may be accepted subject to approval where it is demon-
strated that the risk of delayed eteringite formation is not increased because of
the choice of cementitious materials.

2.15 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Definition of Mix Properties:

1. Concrete strength (f'c) is the minimum compressive strength at 28 days
unless specified otherwise, tested in accordance with ASTM C39.
2. Aggregate size is the largest of the coarse aggregate.

20/03/2013

3. Slump shall be measured at the point of delivery in accordance with
ASTM C143 prior to the addition of superplasticizer (if used). Slump tol-
erance shall meet the requirements of ACI 117. Slump can be increased
with use of a superplasticizer to improve workability of mix. After addition
of superplasticizer, slump shall not exceed 8 (203.2mm) at point of deliv-
ery.
4. Air content is by volume and may be plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of
delivery.
5. Water/cement ratio is specified by weight.
6. Drying shrinkage limit is percentage change in length after 21 days of
drying when tested as per ASTM C157 with 4 inches (101.6mm) x 4
inches (101.6mm) x 11 inches (279.4mm) specimen moist cured 7 days
prior to drying.

B. Foundations Pad Footings and Rafts: Proportion normal-weight concrete
mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength (fc): 35MPa has been used for SD.
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.40
3. SCM Replacement ratio: 10 percent (Silica Fume).
4. Maximum Aggregate Size: 38mm
5. Slump Limit: 4 inches (101.6mm) maximum with water reducing
admixture or 8 inches (203.2mm) with high range water reducing
admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25.4mm).
6. Air Content: 2percent +/- 1.5 percent.
7. Shrinkage Limit: .045 percent.
8. Type I cement plus Silica Fume for all foundations with formation level
within natural ground level..

C. Grade Beams, Basement Slab, Slab on Grade, Retaining Walls: Proportion
normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

3. SCM Replacement ratio: 10 percent (Silica Fume).
4. Maximum Aggregate Size: 25mm.
5. Slump Limit: 4 inches (101.6mm) [5 inches] maximum with water
reducing admixture or 8 inches (203.2mm) with high range water
reducing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25.4mm).
6. Air Content: 2 percent +/- 1.5 percent.
8. Type 1 cement plus Silica Fume for all beams with formation level below
natural ground level.

D. Suspended Slabs: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

2. Minimum 7-day Compressive Strength (fc) : 25MPa has been used for
SD.
4. Maximum Aggregate Size : 25mm
6. Air Content 2 percent +/- 1.5 percent.
7. Shrinkage Limit: .045 percent.]

20/03/2013

E. Walls & Columns: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

2. Minimum 7-day Compressive Strength (fc) : 28MPa has been used for SD.
4. SCM Replacement ratio: 10 percent. (Silica Fume)
5. Maximum Aggregate Size : 25mm.
8. Type 1 cement plus Silica Fume for all parts constructed below natural
ground level. .

F. Normal Weight Concrete Fill in Decking: Proportion normal-weight concrete
mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength (fc): 28MPa.
3. Maximum Aggregate Size: 25mm.
reducing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25.4mm) .
5. Air Content: 2 percent +/- 1.5 percent.
7.

G. Topping On Precast Units: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as
follows:

2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.4.
3. Maximum Aggregate Size: 25mm
reducing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25.4mm) .
5. Air Content: 2 percent +/-1.5 percent.

H. Fill Below Foundations, Blinding: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as
follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength (fc): 20MPa.
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.5.
Type V cement where below natural ground level or in contact with
selected fill.

I. Self-Consolidating Concrete: Use for architectural concrete and heavily re-
inforced members where appropriate to achieve finish and/or necessary
consolidation.

1. Target slump/flow: 600mm to 750mm.
2. The target slump/flow shall be determined by a successful test placement
onsite. The test placement shall verify proper slump/flow, workability,
pumpability, finish and setting time.

20/03/2013

3. All self-consolidating concrete shall contain the specified high-range
water-reducing admixture and viscosity-enhancing admixture as required.
4. To comply with ACI 237R-07 Self Consolidating Concrete.

2.16 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard
Practice."

2.17 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M, ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. The batching plant shall be equipped with an electric metering device
capable of determining moisture content of sand.
2. Begin the mixing operation within thirty minutes after the cement has
been intermingled with the aggregates.
3. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30C and 32.C),
reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when
air temperature is above 90 deg F (32C), reduce mixing and delivery
time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

A. At least one month prior to commencement of concrete work, meet at the
Project site to review methods and sequence of concrete construction, standard
of workmanship, material selection, testing and quality control requirements, de-
tailed requirements of the design mixes, placement procedures, off-site batching
requirements, coordination of the work with other trades and other pertinent top-
ics related to the Work. The meeting shall include the following:

1. Company Representatives
2. Construction Manager/General Contractor
3. Concrete Subcontractor
4. Owners Testing Laboratory
5. Ready Mix Concrete Supplier
6. Admixture Manufacturer Representative
7. Formwork Manufacturer/Supplier
8. Lightweight Aggregate Supplier
9. Any other subcontractor and/or material supplier including plumbing,
waterproofing and electrical supplier or manufacturer required

B. The minutes shall include a statement by the concrete contractor indicating that
the proposed mix design and placing techniques shall produce the concrete
quality required by these specifications.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be
performed. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion
of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been cor-
rected.

B. Prior to Work specified in this Section, carefully inspect the installed Work of
other trades and verify that such Work is complete to the point where this in-
stallation may properly commence.

20/03/2013

C. Verify that forms may be constructed in accordance with all applicable codes
and regulations, the referenced standards, and the design documents.

1. Ensure Excavations are sufficient to permit placement, inspection, and
removal of forms.
2. Verify reinforcing steel has been inspected prior to concealing with
formwork.
3. Verify geotechnical engineer has approved all foundation excavations.
D. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions prior to starting construction.
E. Coordinate:

1. Obtain necessary information for coordination of formwork with items to
be embedded in concrete.
2. Coordinate size and location of openings in concrete. Obtain Company
Representative approval for openings not shown on Structural Drawings.
F. Discrepancies:
1. Notify the Company Representative of any discrepancies or
inconsistencies.
2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until such
discrepancies have been fully resolved.

3.3 FORMWORK

A. Mock-up: When a mock-up of the concrete is required, do not construct forms
for concrete, other than for mock-up, until mock-up has been accepted.

B. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 347 to
support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that
might be applied, until structure can support such loads and such that formwork
can withstand excessive deflection when filled with wet concrete.

C. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape,
alignment, elevation, camber and position indicated, within tolerance limits of
ACI 117. Make proper provision for all openings, offsets, recesses, anchorage,
blocking, and other features of the Work as shown or required. Provide open-
ings as required for vibrators and concrete placing and for venting of displaced
air.

D. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or
gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 3mm for smooth-formed finished surfaces.
2. Class B, 6mm for rough-formed finished surfaces.

E. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Tape all joints
at forms for sandblasted finished concrete, including joints between plywood
and trim strips.

F. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete
surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast
concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 hor-
izontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

20/03/2013

G. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve
required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and se-
cure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting- type
screeds.

H. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior
area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to
forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate tempo-
rary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

I. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

J. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds,
and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades
providing such items.

K. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood,
sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

L. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent
mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

M. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufac-
turer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. Do not allow excess
form coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with in-
place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed.

3.4 EARTH FORMS

A. Earth Forms:

1. Where sides are unstable or excavations are not accurately cut to tol-
erances of ACI 301, construct formwork to the extent required, at no
additional cost to Owner.
2. Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms; remove loose dirt prior to
placing concrete.
3. Form footings to minimum extent shown on Drawings.

3.5 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for
adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use
setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished
with items to be embedded. Ensure that embedded items are placed and held,
during placing of concrete, to tolerances consistent with other items that will be
attached to them. All embedded items within 25mmof the surface of concrete
that is not within a controlled internal environments shall be of stainless steel or
other suitable corrosion resistant material

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and
complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard
Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flash-
ings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is
shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions.
3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures.
4. Install concrete accessories in accordance with manufacturers
recommendations: straight, level, and plumb.

20/03/2013

B. Provide pipe sleeves when pipes pass through concrete. Fill voids in sleeves,
inserts and anchor slots with readily removable material to prevent entry of
concrete into voids.

C. Coring of concrete after placement is not permitted without prior approval by the

D. Conduits, pipes and other items made from aluminium shall not be embedded
in structural concrete unless effectively coated to prevent aluminium-concrete
reaction.

3.6 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the
Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumula-
tively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10C) for 24 hours after placing concrete,
if concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and
curing and protection operations are maintained.

1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural ele-
ments that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has
achieved at least 70 percent of its specified design compressive strength,
fc. Where a minimum 7-day strength has been specified, formwork may
be removed when the 7-day strength as been achieved.
2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of
forms without loosening or disturbing shores.
3. When forms are removed in less than 7 days, curing shall be continued
as follows:
a. Loosen form ties and run water down inside of form to keep
concrete wet.
b. Immediately following form removal, thoroughly wet surface.
c. Continue curing as specified elsewhere in this specification.
d. Where mixture utilizes fly ash curing time shall be a minimum of 14
days

B. Remove forms carefully to avoid damaging corners and edges of exposed
concrete. Prying against the face of concrete shall not be allowed.

C. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, de-
laminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for
exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

D. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten
to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched
forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless agreed by Company Representa-
tive.

E. Re-use of forms shall in no way delay or change the schedule for placement of
concrete from the schedule obtained if all of the forms were new.

F. All forms below ground surface, along with all shores and braces, shall be
removed before backfilling.

3.7 SHORES AND RESHORES

A. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of
shoring and reshoring.

20/03/2013

1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances
is complete.

B. In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number
of stories to distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be
excessively loaded or will induce tensile stress in concrete members without
sufficient steel reinforcement.

C. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete.
Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without
excessive stress or deflection.

3.8 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to
ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Lap joints 150mm and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

3.9 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing
reinforcement.

1. Wherever embedded items interfere with placing of reinforcement notify
the Company Representative and obtain approval before placing any
concrete. Do not bend or field cut bars around openings or sleeves.
2. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor
retarder before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign
materials that would reduce bond to concrete. Where there is a potential of rust
staining adjacent finish surfaces, take necessary steps to prevent staining.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement,
particularly under the weight of workmen and the placement of concrete. Use
bar supports in sufficient number, size and location to prevent vertical dis-
placement of the reinforcement and gouging of the formwork. Locate and
support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover.
Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

1. Do not exceed the tolerances specified in ACI 117.
2. Reinforcement shall be held in place by means of supports adequate to
prevent displacement and to maintain reinforcement at proper distance
from form face. The use of wood supports and spacers inside the forms
is not permitted.
3. Dowels shall be tied securely in place before concrete is deposited. In
the event there are no bars in position to which a dowel may be tied, No
3 bars (minimum) shall be added to provide proper support and
anchorage.
4. Do not place reinforcement in floor slabs or beams until concrete has
been placed in columns and walls, except where bars extend down into
columns or walls.
5. Use templates for placement of column dowels.
6. Where Drawings do not show the spacing of the reinforcing, the minimum
clear spacing shall conform to ACI 318 Section 7.6.
7. Reinforcing partially embedded in concrete shall not be field bent except
as accepted by Company Representative.

20/03/2013

8. Wherever conduits, piping, inserts, sleeves, etc., interfere with placing of
reinforcing steel, obtain acceptance of method of procedure before any
concrete is placed. Bending of bars around openings or sleeves not
permitted.
9. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4, only where indicated on
drawings. Welding is not permitted on bars where the carbon equivalent
is unknown. Do not weld within 2 bar diameters of where bars have been
bent cold. Welding material, wire cuttings and tramp metal shall be thor-
oughly cleaned from forms for exposed concrete before any concrete is
placed.

D. Splicing: Make splices only at those locations shown on the Drawings or as
accepted by the Company Representative. Splice locations not shown on the
Drawings shall be approved in shop drawings before fabrication. Stagger
splices in adjacent bars wherever possible.

E. Reinforcing shall be rigidly and securely tied with steel tie wire. Set wire ties
with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

F. If allowed, field bending or straightening shall be in accordance with section
3.3.2.8 of ACI 301.

G. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports
spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least
one mesh spacing plus 2 inches 50mm or 6 inches 150mm, whichever is great-
er. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either di-
rection. Lace overlaps with wire.

H. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with
epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D3963. Use epoxy-coated steel wire
ties to fasten epoxy-coated steel reinforcement.

I. Zinc-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged zinc coatings with zinc
repair material according to ASTM A780. Use galvanized steel wire ties to
fasten zinc-coated steel reinforcement.

J. Install deformed bar anchors in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.

K. Install mechanical splices and reinforcing couplers in accordance with
manufacturers recommendations.

L. Minimum concrete cover for outer most rebar shall be provided for
reinforcement of cast-in-place concrete structures per SAES-Q-001

Concrete Structure Minimum
Cover mm / in
Concrete cast against or permanently exposed to earth
(including foundations over a sub-slab)
75 / 3
Formed concrete exposed to earth or weather
Supporting Process Equipment
Buildings, walkway platforms, stairs, AC pads

75 / 3
50 / 2
Concrete not exposed to weather nor in contact with ground
(which can be inspected from all sides):
Beams, columns
Slabs, walls, joists

50 / 2
25 / 1
Concrete exposed to sea water, raw water or sewage 75 / 3

20/03/2013

Between reinforcement and anchor flange/pipe within
pipeline anchor blocks
100 / 4
Concrete slab over 50 mm sub-slab 50 / 2
Sidewalks, walkways, etc. 50 / 2

3.10 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane
of concrete. Joints not specified on the design drawings shall be in accordance
with ACE 301.

B. Existing Concrete to New Concrete Joints

1. Chip keys and roughen existing concrete surfaces where new concrete
abuts. Roughen surface by bushhammering, chipping or sandblasting to
remove surface mortar and expose clean aggregate.
2. Drill and install dowels using epoxy grout in accordance with
manufacturer's printed recommendations.
3. Prime surface with 10-mil (0.25mm) layer of epoxy adhesive using a stiff
brush. Place concrete while the epoxy adhesive is still tacky. Re-prime if
necessary.

C. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not
impaired, at locations indicated or as accepted by Company Representative.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforce-
ment across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not con-
tinue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.
2. In walls: do not space construction joints more than 60 feet (18.3m) apart
in horizontal direction, maximum 20 feet (6.1m) apart in vertical direction
unless otherwise shown. In framed slabs and beams, and on metal deck
slabs, do not space construction joints more than 120 feet (36.6m) apart.
In slabs on grade, do not space construction joints more than maximum
60 feet (18.2m) in any direction. Place construction joints perpendicular
to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints
except as otherwise shown.
3. Form keyed joints at indicated locations. Embed keys at least 35mm into
concrete.
4. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of
spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam
width from a beam-girder intersection.
5. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors,
slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.
6. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers
integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where
possible.
7. Roughen surface at all construction joints where key is not used and un-
der baseplates. Roughen concrete surface while concrete is still green
where possible. Do not leave laitance, loosened particles of aggregate
or damaged concrete at surface. Forms and reinforcing shall be cleaned
of drippings. Dampen contact surfaces of construction joints, leaving
them free of standing water, before placing fresh concrete.
8. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against
hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

20/03/2013

D. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints,
sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a
depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving
and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 3mm. Repeat grooving of
contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool
marks on concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with
shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 3mm wide joints
into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise
damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction
cracks.

E. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler
strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals,
foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with
finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 10mm or more than
25mm below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated.
3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more
than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.

F. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where
indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent
concrete bonding to one side of joint.

3.11 WATERSTOPS

A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated to
form a continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support
and protect exposed waterstops during progress of the Work. Field fabricate
joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's written instructions. Comply
with ACI 301.

B. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other lo-
cations indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions, adhesive
bonding, mechanically fastening, and firmly pressing into place. Install in
longest lengths practicable. Comply with ACI 301.

3.12 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and
embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been per-
formed. Ensure that all foreign material has been removed from surfaces, in-
cluding reinforcement and embedded items, against which concrete will be
placed.

B. The addition of water at the site is contingent upon full time inspection of the
process by the owners testing laboratory and the acceptance of the Inspector.
Comply with ACI 301, section 4.3.2.1.

C. Method: Convey concrete as rapidly and directly as practicable to preserve
quality and to prevent segregation.

20/03/2013

1. Do not deposit concrete that has initially set. Retempering of concrete,
which has partially set, is not permitted.
2. Maximum time for discharge of concrete shall be per ASTM C94.

D. Sequence: Pour all walls and columns full height to designated construction joints.
Pour all beams, and horizontal structures to designated construction joints. Con-
struction joints to be made in walls only where indicated on the Drawings.

E. Placement: Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous
operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section
is complete. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Concrete shall not be placed prior to a recorded pre-placement in-
spection, approval and authorization to proceed by Company Repre-
sentative.
2. Equipment made of aluminum alloys shall not be used for pump lines, trem-
ies, or chutes used to discharge concrete from a truck mixer.
3. When placing is once started, carry it on as a continuous operation until
placement of the panel or section is complete. Construction joints to be made
only where indicated on the Drawings or on approved shop drawings. Pre-
vent the formation of cold joints at other locations.
4. Deposit concrete in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness
that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough
to cause seams or planes of weakness. Deposit concrete in a manner to
avoid inclined construction joints.
5. Particular care shall be used when starting a concrete pour to maintain the
continuity of appearance. Use all means necessary to avoid blemishes, im-
perfections, or changes in the finish.
6. Raking shall not be used for movement of concrete after placement.
7. Concrete shall be deposited as near as possible in its final position to avoid
segregation due to re-handling or flowing.
8. Retempering of concrete is prohibited after it has set to the extent that it can-
not be readily worked with a vibrator.
9. Concrete shall not be dropped freely where reinforcing will cause seg-
regation nor shall it be dropped freely more than 1016 mm.
10. Concrete shall be placed on a clean surface. Standing water shall be re-
moved prior to placement of concrete.
11. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.

F. Consolidation: Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thor-
oughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to
ACI 301. Use and type of vibrator shall conform to ACI 309, Guide for Consol-
idation of Concrete.
2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw
vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed
layer and at least 150mm into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into
lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. Place vibrating ele-
ment directly in concrete and not attached to either inside or outside of forms or
to reinforcing steel.
3. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to
consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other
embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

G. Initial Finishing:
1. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct ele-
vations.
2. Where floor drains or floor slopes are indicated, slope slabs uniformly to pro-
vide even fall for drainage.

20/03/2013

3. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-
textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface.
Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

H. Fill Over Steel Deck:

1. At floor slabs, increase fill thickness as required to compensate for deflection of
beams and deck at no additional cost to Owner. Maintain specified thickness
of concrete uniformly along supporting beams. Obtain specified fill thickness at
high, points of the deck. Finish floor to specified tolerances for floor flatness
and levelness, including at suspended fill on steel deck floors

I. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. When concrete is expected to be placed at air temperatures of greater than 80
deg F (26.7C), contractor shall review with Company Representative all spe-
cial procedures that will be used including mix design modifications and meth-
ods of protection. This review shall occur prior to the expected extreme tem-
peratures.
2. Provide sufficient protection material and equipment on the Project site in ad-
vance of the time when the mean daily temperatures are expected to rise
above 80 degrees F (26.7C) .
3. When air temperature exceeds 80 deg F (26.7C), take special precautions
to prevent slump loss, rapid setting, and plastic shrinkage; including but not
limited to:
a. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32.2C) at time of
placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control
temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total
amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Con-
tractor's option.
b. Use set retarding admixture in accordance with previously ac-
cepted submittals.
c. Convey, deposit, finish and commence curing of concrete as rap-
idly as practicable.

4. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing con-
crete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or
dry areas.

J. Do not adjust concrete with any procedure, which will cause segregation.

K. Screed concrete, which is to receive other construction to the proper level to avoid
excessive skimming and grouting.

L. Do not use concrete which becomes non-plastic and unworkable, or does not meet
the required quality control limits, or which has been contaminated by foreign mate-
rials.

M. Remove rejected concrete from the site and dispose of it in a location approved by
the Company Representative for that purpose.
3.13 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material
with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projec-
tions exceeding 6mm

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing materi-
al, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams.
Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that
exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

20/03/2013

C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete
where indicated:

1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten
concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until
producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other
than that created by the rubbing process.
2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a con-
sistency of thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part port-
land cement to one and one-half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bond-
ing admixture and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined
by trial patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Scrub
grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface
with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.
3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one
part portland cement and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding
agent and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial
patches so color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Compress grout
into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork
float.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar un-
formed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a
texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of
formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise
indicated.

3.14 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and fin-
ishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screed-
ed and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a
profile amplitude of 6mm in 1 direction.

C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area
is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots,
and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a
uniform, smooth, granular texture.

D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate con-
crete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten
until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind
smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor
coverings.

1. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a
randomly trafficked floor surface:
a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and of levelness, F(L)
20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and of levelness,
F(L) 15. These values apply to all floors and slabs unless noted
otherwise.
b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L)
25; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of
levelness, F(L) 17. These values apply to slabs-on-grade

2. Slabs supporting modular office partitions, adhered flooring systems, or com-
pact storage shelving must also comply with the manufacturers tolerance re-

20/03/2013

quirements.
3. Slabs scheduled to receive wood flooring must also comply with tolerances
required for installation of wood flooring. Finish and measure surface so gap
at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-foot
long straightedge resting on 2 high spots and placed anywhere on the surface
does not exceed 6mm.
4. Fill or grind completed floors as necessary to achieve specified finish toler-
ances. Fill shall be with a self-leveling cementitious product capable of being
tapered to a feathered edge.
a. Repair any floor section measuring below either the minimum local
F-number or the minimum local L-number.

E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify sur-
face with a fine broom.

1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel finished floor sur-
faces.

F. Broom Finish: Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by
brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate re-
quired final finish with Architect before application.

G. Slip-Resistive Finish: Before final floating, apply slip-resistive aggregate finish.
Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:

1. Uniformly spread 25 lb/100 sq. ft.(1.22kg/m) of dampened slip-resistive ag-
gregate over surface in 1 or 2 applications. Tamp aggregate flush with sur-
face, but do not force below surface.
2. After broadcasting and tamping, apply float finish.
3. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or an abrasive stone
and water to expose slip-resistive

H. Schedule of Concrete Finish Types, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings:

1. Formed Surfaces Not Exposed To View: Rough Formed.
2. Formed Surfaces Exposed To View At Building Interior: Smooth Formed.
3. Formed Surfaces Exposed To View At Building Exterior: Smooth
Formed.
4. Formed Surfaces to Receive:
a. Paint: Grout Cleaned.
b. Waterproofing, Dampproofing: Smooth Formed. c.
Veneer Plaster: Smooth Formed.

5. Exposed Interior Slabs: Trowel.
6. Exposed Stair Fills and Ramps: Nonslip Aggregate.
7. Slabs to Receive:
a. Concrete Toppings: Float.
b. Mortar Setting Beds: Scratch.
c. Membrane Waterproofing: Float.
d. Fluid Applied Waterproofing: Trowel. e.
Resilient Flooring: Trowel.
f. Carpet: Trowel.
g. Tile (thin-set): Fine Broom.

8. Exposed to View Curbs: Provide monolithic finish by stripping forms while
concrete is green and steel-troweling surfaces to a dense, hard, finish with
corners intersections and terminations slightly rounded.


20/03/2013

3.15 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indi-
cated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as speci-
fied, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling
indicated or required to complete the Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete
is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners,
intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and
foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equip-
ment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufac-
turer furnishing machines and equipment.

D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and as-
sociated items. Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed,
tamp, and trowel-finish concrete surfaces.

E. Post-Installed Concrete Anchors

1. Install in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and ICC- ES
reports.
2. Use washers on all bolts.
3. Use care to avoid cutting or damaging reinforcing bars.
4. When exposed to view in the final structure, bolts shall be of a length that will
extend entirely through but not more than 1/4-inch (6.4mm) beyond the nuts
unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.

F. Install concrete fill on a continuous wire mesh of not less than 14 gage welded wire
fabric, 2 inch (50.8mm) square, supported approximately inch (12.7mm) above the
bottom of pans. Screed concrete fill level and finish with wood float.

3.16 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for
hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Where supplementary cementitious materials are used, extra precautions shall be
taken to prevent premature drying.

C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if
hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft.(0.98k/m )
x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written
instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before
float finishing.
D. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams,
supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period,
moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, con-
tinue curing for the remainder of the curing period.

E. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure un-
formed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other sur-
faces.

F. All structural concrete shall be continuously water cured in accordance with recom-
mendation of ACI 305R, ACI 308 and as modified below. To avoid self desiccation of
the concrete mix, only water curing method shall be used to cure the structural con-

20/03/2013

crete. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following
methods:

1. Maximum total dissolved solids in water used for curing shall not exceed
1000 parts per million.
2. Water curing shall be continuous until the compressive strength has reached
70% of the specified strength, but not less than what is specified in Table 2.1 of
ACI308R.
3. Saturate burlaps shall be covered with a plasticized sheet vapour barrier, min-
imum 6 mils (0.15mm) in thickness and shall be kept in contact with the con-
crete surface at all times.

4. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray
or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas sub-
jected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain
continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
a. After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without
damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing com-
pound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will
not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

5. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated
in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's
written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three
hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a sec-
ond coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing pe-
riod.
6. Interior slabs to receive resilient flooring: Cure only with moisture re-
taining cover. Do not cure with curing compound.
7. Interior slabs to receive thin set of tile: Cure only with moisture retaining cover.
Do not cure with curing compound.

3.17 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid
floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other con-
taminants and complete surface repairs.
2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than [three] [seven] [14] 28 days' old.
3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms;
rewet; and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess
material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if sur-
face is rough or porous.
B. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing com-
pound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's
written instructions.

3.18 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written in-
structions.

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least [one] [six] two month(s).
Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints;
leave contact faces of joint clean and dry.

C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 50mm deep in

20/03/2013

formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.

3.19 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Repair and patch defective areas when agreed by Company Representative.
Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Company Rep-
resentatives approval. Repair and replacement work will be done at Contractors ex-
pense.

B. Defective Concrete is defined as concrete which is under strength, out of line, level or
plumb, or shows objectionable cracks, honeycombing, rock pockets voids, spalling,
exposed reinforcement, that has any sawdust, wood, or debris embedded in it, or is
otherwise defective, and in the Company Representatives judgment these defects
impair the proper strength or appearance of the work. Any concrete work not in ac-
cordance with the Specification and Drawings will
be deemed to be defective.

C. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland ce-
ment to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only
enough water for handling and placing.

D. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities,
cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on
the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids
more than 10mm in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than 25mm.
Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with
water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact
with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with
patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement
and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match
surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mix-
ture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in
place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's du-
rability and structural performance as determined by Company Repre-
sentative.

E. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs,
for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface.
Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and
smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls,
popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch
(0.244mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unre-
inforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.
2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface
finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mor-
tar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair un-
derlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer accord-
ing to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane,
and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping.
Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of
1/4 inch (6.4mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply

20/03/2013

repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to
produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.
6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch
(25.4mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete.
Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforce-
ment with at least a 3/4-inch (19.1mm) clearance all around. Dampen con-
crete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent.
Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete ex-
cept without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with ad-
jacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
7. Repair random cracks and single holes 25mm or less in diameter with patch-
ing mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and
clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces
and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has
dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep
patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

F. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject Company Representatives ap-
proval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

G. Concrete Repaair shall comply with in Acordance with SAER-5083 Concrete
Repair manual.

H. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to
Company Representatives approval.


A. Testing and Inspecting: The Contactor shall engage a special inspector and inde-
pendent approved agencies to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test
reports. The selection of the independent approved agencies shall be subject to the
approval of the Company Representative. The Company Representative may, at his
discretion, call for tests tor inspections to be verified by separate approved agency.
B. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement.
2. Steel reinforcement welding.
3. Headed bolts and studs.
4. Post-installed concrete anchors, per ICC-ES recommendations.
5. Verification of use of required design mixture.
6. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.
7. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.
8. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from
beams and slabs.

C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained ac-
cording to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following require-
ments:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu.
yd or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.
a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five
compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be
conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each
batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C143; one test at point of placement for each composite sam-
ple, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.
Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
3. Air Content: ASTM C231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete;

20/03/2013

ASTM C173, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; ]one test
for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of
each concrete mixture.
4. Water Content: In accordance with AASHTO T318.
5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C1064; one test hourly when air temperature
is 40 deg F (4.4C) and below and when 80 deg F (26.7C) and above, and
one test for each composite sample.
6. Unit Weight: ASTM C567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete;
one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's
pour of each concrete mixture.
7. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31.
a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder spec-
imens for each composite sample.

8. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C39;
a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two
specimens at 28 days.
b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive
strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite
sample and tested at age indicated.

9. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any
three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified
compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below
specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4Mpa).
10. Test results shall be reported in writing to Company Representative, concrete
manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compres-
sive-strength tests shall contain Project identification
name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and
inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design
compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials,
compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28- day
tests.
11. Non-destructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive
device may be permitted by Company Representative but will not be used as
sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.
12. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of
concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive
strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Company
Representative. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to deter-
mine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42 or by
other methods as directed by Company Representative.
a. If test results indicate that compressive strength requirements have not
been met, the Contractor shall justify that the load carrying capacity of
the structure has not been reduced. Carry out tests of cores drilled from
the area in question as directed by the Company Representative in ac-
cordance with ASTM C43 and ACI
318 Section 5.6.5.
b. If the compressive tests of the core specimens fail to show the com-
pressive strength specified, the concrete shall be deemed defective and
shall be replaced or adequately strengthened in a manner acceptable to
the Company Representative. Perform load tests as outlined in ASTM
C39, as directed by the Company Representative, on the questionable
portion of the Work.
13. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed
to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified re-
quirements.
14. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate does
not comply with the Contract Documents or required standards.


20/03/2013

D. Reinforcing Steel

1. Notify the testing agency and the Company Representative at least 48 hours
before concrete is to be poured or reinforcing is covered up.
2. Before any concrete is poured on any particular portion of the building,
the reinforcing steel and form dimensions will be inspected by the Testing
Agency. Any errors or discrepancies shall be corrected before concrete is
placed.
3. In addition to other required inspections, the following are subject to
Special Inspection as per IBC Chapter 1704.4:
a. Placement of Reinforcing Steel b.
Welding of Reinforcing Steel
4. A special inspector from the Testing Agency shall be present during all field
bending of reinforcement.
5. Installation of deformed bar anchors to be tested in accordance with
Section 7.1 of AWS D1.1.
6. Welding of Reinforcement: There shall be continuous inspection during all
welding of reinforcement. All butt welds to be inspected using radiographic
testing or other agreed form of ND testing. At the Owners option recognized
non-destructive tests such as resistance, Magnetic Particle Examination, and
Liquid Penetrant Inspection may be used to inspect the welds.
7. Comply with ICC-ES approvals with respect to special inspection re-
quired during installation.
8. Testing and inspection of mechanical splices and reinforcing couplers to con-
form to manufacturer's recommendations and ICC-ES approval.
E. Survey and Adjustment: Continuously observe formwork operations, record such
observations on a daily basis, and submit reports of the results. Instrument check
forms before and during concrete placement to assure no movement has taken
place. Make appropriate corrections to reposition displaced forms.

1. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E1155 within
48 hours of finishing.
2. Certify, by written report submitted on a weekly basis, for each level and story
that the elevations, finish lines and building lines of the hardened concrete are
within tolerances, as substantiated by transit survey; also that all embeds and
inserts have been installed within tolerance.


Besix
SECTION 055000 METAL
FABRICATIONS

KASC-XX-A0-XX-OVE-SPC-ZZ-200012
REV 1 | 22 December 2011

CONTRACT

This report takes into account the particular
instructions and requirements of our client.
It is not intended for and should not be relied
upon by any third party and no responsibility is
undertaken to any third party.

J ob number 218250
Ove Arup & Partners Ltd

www.arup.com
REV A

Re3isio(
A
)evision A Contra#t
Architectural Specification
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ-XX-RSP-AO-00001
Rev 1.0 | February 2011
REFERENCE DESIGN

SECTION 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS

Job number 214607

Arup Gulf Ltd
13 Fitzroy Street
London W1T 4BQ
arup.com
Aramco Overseas Company King Abdullah Sports City

WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ_XX_RSP-AO-0001 Rev 1.0 August 2011 Page 2 of 19
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This is a design build/ contractor engineered section. Work includes structural
design, drawings, obtaining approval from authorities having jurisdiction,
fabricating, finishing and installation of the works described.
B. Section Includes:

1. Steel framing and supports for countertops.
2. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
3. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are
not specified in other Sections.
4. Elevator machine beams, hoist beams, and/or divider beams.
5. Steel shapes for supporting elevator door sills.
6. Steel girders for supporting wood frame construction.
7. Prefabricated building columns.
8. Shelf angles.
9. Metal ladders.
10. Ladder safety cages.
11. Alternating tread devices.
12. Metal ships' ladders and/or pipe crossovers.
13. Metal floor plate and supports.
14. Structural-steel door frames.
15. Miscellaneous steel trim including steel angle corner guards and/or steel
edgings and/or loading-dock edge angles.
16. Metal bollards.
17. Pipe and/or Downspout guards.
18. Abrasive metal nosings and/or treads and/or thresholds.
19. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not
specified in other Sections.
C. T-Sheet Component or Elements:

1. Type AM-301 Row extension for wheelchair.
2. Type AM-302 As AM-301, but adapted for use with the media desk Type
AM-308.
3. Type AM-305 Camera platform and balustrade.
4. Type AM-306 Camera platform and balustrade surround and gate.
5. Type AM-307 Camera platform and balustrade surround and gate.
6. Type AM-308 Riser access metal deck.
7. Type AM-311 Galvanised steps for temporary and permanent use.


8. Type AM-312 Galvanised steps (3 step unit).
9. Type AM-401 Metal Ladder - Cat ladder
10. Type AM-402 Metal Ladder - Ship ladder
11. Type AM-403 Galvanized steel maintenance access walkway including
associated balustrade.
12. Type AM-701 Freestanding metal framed and topped bar counter with bin.
Counter to be 1200h x 400d x length as drawing.
13. Type AM-702, as AM-701, but with reduced height for the disabled. Counter
to be 1200l x 400d x height to suit wheelchair users.
14. Type AM-705 Metal wearing bars. 10mm wide stainless steel wearing bars
set into slab surface @ 600mm CRS protruding 10mm from slab surface.
15. Type AM-706 Minbar.
16. Type AM-707 Stainless steel capping top ablutions fountain
17. Type ASE-101 Fall arrest/restraint cable system (Note: Refer to the Building
Management Systems by Specialist, only finishes to be covered by this
Section).
18. Type CLG-805 Net ceiling.
19. Type EWS-801 Gold plated metal lunar emblem
20. Type TRM-401 Metal skirting.
21. Type TRM-501 Stair nosings.
22. Type EXT-321 Tree grilles.
23. Type EXT-321a Ground lighting grille (to minaret).
D. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section:
1. Loose steel lintels.
2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type
inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.
3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where
they are not specified in other Sections.
E. Related Sections:
1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel
pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast
into concrete. Refer to the Structural Engineers documentation.
2. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and
other items built into unit masonry. Refer to the Structural Engineers
documentation.
3. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing." Refer to the Structural Engineers
documentation.
4. Section 055100 "Metal Stairs."
5. Section 055213 "Pipe and Tube Railings."
6. Section 055300 "Metal Gratings."
7. Section 057000 "Decorative Metal."
8. Section 057300 "Decorative Metal Railings."
9. Section 088000 Glazing.
10. Section 102213 "Wire Mesh Partitions."
11. Section 329300 "Plants" for tree grates.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design including comprehensive engineering analysis by a
qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria


indicated, including Seismic Design, refer to the Structural Engineers
documentation. Also refer to Clause 1.2A.
B. Structural Performance of Aluminum Ladders: Aluminum ladders, including
landings, shall withstand the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under
conditions specified in ANSI A14.3.
C. Structural Performance of Alternating Tread Devices: Alternating tread devices
shall withstand the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions
specified in ICC's International Building Code.
D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling,
opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other
detrimental effects.
1. Temperature Change: 67 deg C, ambient; 100 deg C, material surfaces.
E. For the purposes of this Specification, External also refers to non-air-conditioned
Internal areas of the buildings.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes.
2. Prefabricated building columns.
3. Metal nosings and treads.
4. Paint products.
5. Grout.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of extruded nosing and/or tread.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.
B. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel certifying that products
furnished comply with requirements.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop
primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the
following:
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
2. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction
contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them.
Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages and steel weld plates and angles for casting
into concrete. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing
anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral
anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to
Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless
otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work,
provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or
blemishes.
2.2 FERROUS METALS
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Post-consumer recycled content plus one-half
of pre-consumer recycled content not less than 25 or number as indicated on
Drawing.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36M.
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240M or ASTM A 666,
Type 316L.
D. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 316L.


E. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM
A 36M or ASTM A 283M, Grade C or D.
F. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793.
G. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.
H. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise
indicated.
I. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with
MFMA-4.
1. Size of Channels: 41 by 41 mm or as indicated on Drawing or to contractor
design, subject to Company Representative approval.
2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653M, commercial steel, Type B
and/or structural steel, Grade 230, with Z275 coating; 2.8-mm or2-mm
and/or1.6-mm nominal thickness.
3. Material: Cold-rolled steel, ASTM A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B
and/or structural steel, Grade 230; 2.5-mm and/or1.7-mm and/or 1.35-mm
minimum thickness; unfinished and/or coated with rust-inhibitive, baked-on,
acrylic enamel and/or hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
J. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47M,
unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners for
exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or
ASTM F 1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade,
and class required.
1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.
2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver.
3. Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze.
B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325M, Type 3; with
hex nuts, ASTM A 563M, Class 8S3; and, where required, flat washers.
C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed flush countersunk
stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 738M; with hex nuts, ASTM F 836M; and, where
required, flat washers; Alloy Group A1 and/or Group A4.
D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts,
ASTM A 563; and, where required, flat washers.
1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where
item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
E. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.
F. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.7M.
G. Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.3.8M.


H. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1.
I. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22M.
J. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.2M.
K. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to
six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load
imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to
ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency employed by the
contractor.
L. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless
otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47M malleable
iron or ASTM A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all
hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.
M. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors and/or chemical
anchors to contractor design, subject to applicable regulatory codes and other
requirements.
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to
comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy
Group A1 and/or Group A4 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 738M, and nuts,
ASTM F 836M.
N. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels
(struts) complying with MFMA-4, 41 by 22 mm by length indicated with anchor
straps or studs not less than 75 mm long at not more than 200 mm o.c. Provide with
temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated
to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for
metal alloy welded.
B. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and
product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard
Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using
Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
C. Shop Primers: To contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval.
D. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-
alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-
rich primer.
E. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.


1. Products: To contractor design, subject to Company Representative
approval.
F. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-
Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
G. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
H. Non-shrink, Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate grout complying
with ASTM C 1107, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy-duty
loading applications.
I. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive,
nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically
recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
J. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete"
for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive
strength of 20 MPa.
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible.
Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use
connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for
reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges
to a radius of approximately 1 mm unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or
rough areas on exposed surfaces.
C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain
separation or otherwise impairing work.
D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and
blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface
matches that of adjacent surface.
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use
Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints
where least conspicuous.
G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner
to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.


H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish
hardware, screws, and similar items.
I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure.
Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support
indicated loads.
1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip
with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 3.2 by 38 mm, with a minimum
150-mm embedment and 50-mm hook, not less than 200 mm from ends and
corners of units and 600 mm o.c., unless otherwise indicated. Refer to the
Structural Engineers documentation
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as
needed to complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless
otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as
necessary to receive adjacent construction.
1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated or required.
2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.
C. Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams of sizes
recommended by partition manufacturer with attached bearing plates, anchors, and
braces as recommended by partition manufacturer. Drill or punch bottom flanges of
beams to receive partition track hanger rods; locate holes where indicated on
operable partition Shop Drawings.
D. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes of
sizes indicated.
1. Provide bearing plates welded to beams where indicated.
2. Drill or punch girders and plates for field-bolted connections where indicated.
3. Where wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill or
punch holes at 600 mm o.c.
E. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction from steel pipe
with steel baseplates and top plates as indicated. Drill or punch baseplates and top
plates for anchor and connection bolts and weld to pipe with fillet welds all around.
Make welds the same size as pipe wall thickness unless otherwise indicated.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide 12.7-mm baseplates with four 16-mm
anchor bolts and 6.4-mm top plates.
F. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.
G. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer and/or primer
specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings" where indicated.


2.7 SHELF ANGLES
A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to
concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 19-mm bolts, spaced
not more than 150 mm from ends and 600 mm o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners.
2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make
open joint approximately 50 mm larger than expansion or control joint.
B. Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls.
C. Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.
D. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles
to cast-in-place concrete.
2.8 PERMANENT ACCESS EQUIPMENT
A. Type ASE-101 Fall arrest/restraint cable system:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:

a. Fall Protect or equal and approved.
b. Latchways - (Product: Mansafe) or equal and approved.
c. Uniline Safety or equal and approved.
2.9 METAL LADDERS/ WALKWAYS
A. General:
1. Comply with ANSI A14.3 unless otherwise indicated.
2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1.
B. Steel Ladders:
1. Space siderails 406 mm and/or457 mm apart unless otherwise indicated.
2. Space siderails of elevator pit ladders 300 mm apart.
3. Siderails: Continuous, 9.5-by-64-mm and/or12.7-by-64-mm steel flat bars,
with eased edges.
4. Rungs: 19-mm- diameter and/or19-mm- square and/or25-mm- diameter
and/or25-mm- square steel bars.
5. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail
faces.
6. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive
material metallically bonded to rung.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements to contractor
design, subject to Company Representative approval.



7. Provide platforms as indicated fabricated from welded or pressure-locked
steel bar grating, supported by steel angles. Limit openings in gratings to no
more than 12 mm and/or19 mm in least dimension.
8. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 1500 mm o.c. with
welded or bolted steel brackets.
9. Galvanize exterior ladders, including brackets and fasteners.
10. Prime exterior ladders, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich
primer. and/orprimer specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance
Coatings."
2.10 LADDER SAFETY CAGES
A. General:
1. Fabricate ladder safety cages to comply with ANSI A14.3. Assemble by
welding or with stainless-steel fasteners.
2. Provide primary hoops at tops and bottoms of cages and spaced not more
than 6 m o.c. Provide secondary intermediate hoops spaced not more than
1200 mm o.c. between primary hoops.
3. Fasten assembled safety cage to ladder rails and adjacent construction by
welding or with stainless-steel fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
B. Steel Ladder Safety Cages:
1. Primary Hoops: 6.4-by-100-mm flat bar hoops.
2. Secondary Intermediate Hoops: 6.4-by-50-mm flat bar hoops.
3. Vertical Bars: 4.8-by-38-mm flat bars secured to each hoop.
4. Galvanize ladder safety cages, including brackets and fasteners.
5. Prime ladder safety cages, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich
primer. and/or primer specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance
Coatings."
2.11 ALTERNATING TREAD DEVICES
A. Alternating Tread Devices: Fabricate alternating tread devices to comply with
ICC's International Building Code. Fabricate of open-type construction with
channel or plate stringers and pipe and tube railings unless otherwise indicated.
Provide brackets and fittings for installation.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following and/or available manufacturers offering products that
following:
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
comparable product by one of the following:
a. Lapeyre Stair Inc or equal and approved
b. Schmidt Structural Products; a subsidiary of Penco Products, Inc or
equal and approved.
3. Fabricate from steel and assemble by welding or with stainless-steel
fasteners.


4. Comply with applicable railing requirements in Section 055213 "Pipe and
Tube Railings."
B. Galvanize exterior steel alternating tread devices, including treads, railings,
brackets, and fasteners.
C. Prime exterior steel alternating tread devices, including treads, railings, brackets,
and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer or primer specified in Section 099600 "High-
Performance Coatings."
2.12 METAL SHIPS' LADDERS and/or PIPE CROSSOVERS
A. Provide metal ships' ladders and pipe crossovers where indicated or to contractor
design, subject to Company Representative approval. Fabricate of open-type
construction with channel or plate stringers and pipe and tube railings unless
otherwise indicated. Provide brackets and fittings for installation.
1. Fabricate ships' ladders and/or pipe crossovers, including railings from steel..
2. Fabricate treads and platforms from welded or pressure-locked steel bar
grating. Limit openings in gratings to no more than 12 mm19 mm in least
dimension.
3. Fabricate treads and platforms from rolled-steel floor plate..
4. Comply with applicable railing requirements in Section 055213 "Pipe and
Tube Railings."
B. Galvanize exterior steel ships' ladders and/or pipe crossovers, including treads,
railings, brackets, and fasteners.
C. Prime exterior steel ships' ladders and/or pipe crossovers, including treads, railings,
brackets, and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer. and/or primer specified in
Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."
2.13 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of
profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter
corners and use concealed field splices where possible.
B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and
installation with other work.
1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete
or masonry construction.
C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.
D. Prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim with zinc-rich primer. and/or primer
specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."
2.14 METAL BOLLARDS
A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe and/or Schedule 80 steel pipe
and/or steel shapes, as indicated


1. Cap bollards with 6.4-mm- thick steel plate.
2. Where bollards are indicated to receive controls for door operators, provide
necessary cutouts for controls and holes for wire.
3. Where bollards are indicated to receive light fixtures, provide necessary
cutouts for fixtures and holes for wire.
B. Fabricate bollards with 9.5-mm- thick steel baseplates for bolting to concrete slab.
Drill baseplates at all four corners for 19-mm anchor bolts.
1. Where bollards are to be anchored to sloping concrete slabs, angle baseplates
for plumb alignment of bollards.
C. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe and/or tubing with 6.4-mm-
thick steel plate welded to bottom of sleeve. Make sleeves not less than 200 mm
deep and 19 mm larger than OD of bollard.
D. Fabricate internal sleeves for removable bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe or 6.4-
mm wall-thickness steel tubing with an OD approximately 1.5 mm less than ID of
bollards. Match drill sleeve and bollard for 19 mm steel machine bolt.
E. Prime bollards with zinc-rich primer or primer to contractor design, subject to
Company Representative approval.
F. Fixed bollards shall, as a minimum:

1. Achieve a minimum certification of one of the following:

a. M30 P1 in accordance with ASTM F 25656-07 Standard Test Method
for Vehicle Crash Testing of Perimeter Barrier.
b. K4 (7.5 Ton (15,000lb) @ 30mph) in accordance with DoD SD-
STD-0.2.01 Rev A, Test Method for Vehicle Crash Testing of
Perimeter Barriers and Gates.
c. V/7 500/48/90:1 in accordance with PAS 68:2010 Impact test
specifications for vehicle security barriers.
d. Stainless steel finish.
e. Minimum height: 700mm.
f. Minimum diameter: 160mm.
g. Maximum clear space between bollards, structural elements or other
HVM measures: 1200mm.
h. Maximum clear spacing between bollards: 1200mm.
2.15 PIPE and/or DOWNSPOUT GUARDS
A. Fabricate pipe and/or downspout guards from 9.5-mm- thick by 300-mm- wide
steel plate, bent to fit flat against the wall or column at both ends and to fit around
pipe with 50-mm clearance between pipe and pipe guard. Drill each end for two 19-
mm anchor bolts.
B. Galvanize pipe and/or downspout guards.
C. Prime pipe and/or downspout guards with zinc-rich primer. and/or primer specified
in Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."


2.16 ABRASIVE METAL NOSINGS and/or TREADS and/or THRESHOLDS
A. Cast-Metal Units: Cast iron, with an integral-abrasive, as-cast finish consisting of
aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both. Fabricate units in
lengths necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Gradus - (Product: XT Range) Internal or equal and approved.
2. Nosings: Cross-hatched units, 100 mm wide with 6-mm and/or25-mm lip,
for casting into concrete steps.
3. Nosings: Cross-hatched units, 38 by 38 mm, for casting into concrete curbs.
4. Treads: Cross-hatched units, full depth of tread with 19-by-19-mm nosing,
for application over bent plate treads or existing stairs.
5. Thresholds: Fluted-saddle-type units, 125 mm wide by 12 mm high, with
tapered edges.
6. Thresholds: Fluted-interlocking- (hook-strip-) type units, 125 mm wide by
16 mm high, with tapered edge.
7. Thresholds: Plain-stepped- (stop-) type units, 125 mm wide by 12 mm high,
with 12-mm step.
B. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units,
as standard with manufacturer.
C. Drill for mechanical anchors and countersink. Locate holes not more than 100 mm
from ends and not more than 300 mm o.c., evenly spaced between ends, unless
otherwise indicated. Provide closer spacing if recommended by manufacturer.
1. Provide two rows of holes for units more than 125 mm wide, with two holes
aligned at ends and intermediate holes staggered.
D. Apply bituminous paint to concealed surfaces of cast-metal units.
E. Apply clear lacquer to concealed surfaces of extruded units.
2.17 TREE GRILLES & MINERET LIGHTING GRILLE
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products from one of the following manufacturers (or equal and approved by
Company Representative):

1. Orsogril or equal and approved.
2. Elefant or equal and approved.
3. Barnett and Bates or equal and approved.
2.18 NET CEILING
A. Type CLG-805 Net Ceiling System:


1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following
product (or equal and approved by Company Representative):
a. Schelde Sports reference S10.W4609, or equal and approved.
2. 2mm diameter nylon net, mesh 45mm x 45mm with white cord.
3. Galvanized steel trackway.
4. System shall include all required fixings.
2.19 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or
concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
B. Galvanize plates.
C. Prime plates with zinc-rich primer.
2.20 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for
openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.
Fabricate in single lengths for each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld
adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.
B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of
clear span but not less than 200 mm unless otherwise indicated.
C. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
D. Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.
2.21 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES
A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items
supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide
each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for
embedding in concrete.
2.22 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
C. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend
into surrounding surface.


2.23 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153M
for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123M for other steel and iron
products.
1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with
paint adhesion.
B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be
embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Shop prime with universal shop primer or primers specified in
Section 099123 "Interior Painting".
C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE
No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." and/or SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
and/or requirements indicated below:
1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,
"Commercial Blast Cleaning."
3. Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Section 099600 "High-
Performance Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast
Cleaning."
4. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application
Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop
painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for
installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location,
alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of
rack; and measured from established lines and levels.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld
connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded
because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of
exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted
or screwed field connections.
C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:


4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and
blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface
matches that of adjacent surface.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where
metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide
threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through
bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.
E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being
supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated
on Shop Drawings.
B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building
structure.
C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns.
Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with
bolts through top plates of pipe columns.
1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on
concrete or masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling
Plates" Article.
D. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and
grout column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates"
Article.
1. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are
installed and leveled.
3.3 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS
A. Bollard installation type subject to contractor design, subject to Company
Representative approval.
B. Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven
days before installing or to manufacturers details.
1. Do not fill removable bollards with concrete.
C. Anchor bollards to existing construction with expansion anchors and/or anchor bolts
and/or through bolts. Provide four 19-mm bolts at each bollard unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Embed anchor bolts at least 100 mm in concrete.


D. Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete
and/or in formed or core-drilled holes not less than 200 mm deep and 19 mm larger
than OD of bollard to contractor design, subject to applicable regulatory codes and
other requirements. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with non-shrink,
nonmetallic grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written
instructions. Slope grout up approximately 3 mm toward bollard.
E. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings to contractor design, subject to
applicable regulatory codes and other requirements. Center and align bollards in
holes 75 mm above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for
consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.
F. Anchor internal sleeves for removable bollards in concrete by inserting into pipe
sleeves preset into concrete and/or formed or core-drilled holes not less than 200
mm deep and 19 mm larger than OD of sleeve to contractor design, subject to
applicable regulatory codes and other requirements. Fill annular space around
internal sleeves solidly with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout; mixed and placed to
comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up
approximately 3 mm toward internal sleeve.
G. Anchor internal sleeves for removable bollards in place with concrete footings.
Center and align sleeves in holes 75 mm above bottom of excavation. Place
concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace sleeves in
position until concrete has cured.
H. Place removable bollards over internal sleeves and secure with 19-mm machine
bolts and nuts. After tightening nuts, drill holes in bolts for inserting padlocks.
Owner will furnish padlocks.
I. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water or to
manufacturers details.
1. Do not fill removable bollards with concrete.
3.4 INSTALLING NOSINGS, TREADS, AND THRESHOLDS
A. Center nosings on tread widths unless otherwise indicated.
B. For nosings embedded in concrete steps or curbs, align nosings flush with riser
faces and level with tread surfaces.
C. Seal thresholds exposed to exterior with elastomeric sealant complying with
Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to provide a watertight installation.
3.5 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and
roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing
members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove
wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before
packing with grout.


1. Use non-shrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations
where not exposed to moisture; use non-shrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed
locations unless otherwise indicated.
2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids
remain.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted
connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same
material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-
painted surfaces.
1. Apply by spray to provide a minimum 0.05-mm) dry film thickness.
B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted
connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099113
"Exterior Painting." and/or Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

REV A

Re3isio(
A
)evision A Contra#t

Rev 1.0 | August 2011

SECTION 055100 METAL STAIRS

Job number 214607

Arup Gulf Ltd
13 Fitzroy Street
London W1T 4BQ
arup.com

SECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRS

PART 1 - GENERAL
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled and/or precast concrete and/or
epoxy-resin-filled and/or abrasive-coating-finished formed-metal treads.
2. Ornamental steel-framed stairs.
3. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs.
4. Steel tube handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs.
5. Railing gates at the level of exit discharge.
C. T-sheet Component or Elements:

1. Type STR-101 Metal stair.
2. Type STR-102 Ceremonial players stair.
3. Type STR-103 Metal stair to Minbar (AM-706).
D. Related Sections:
1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete fill for stair treads and
platforms.
2. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for metal treads and nosings installed at
locations other than in metal stairs and/or alternating tread devices.
3. Section 055213 "Pipe and Tube Railings" for pipe and tube railings not
attached to metal stairs or to walls adjacent to metal stairs.
4. Section 057300 "Decorative Metal Railings" for ornamental metal railings.
5. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for metal backing for
anchoring railings.
6. Section 093000 "Tiling" for ceramic-tile treads and landings for ornamental
steel-framed stairs.
7. Section 096340 "Stone Flooring" for stone treads and landings for ornamental
steel-framed stairs.
8. Section 096400 "Wood Flooring" for wood treads and landings for
ornamental steel-framed stairs.
9. Section 096613 "Portland Cement Terrazzo Flooring" and/or Section 096623
"Resinous Matrix Terrazzo Flooring" for terrazzo treads and landings for
ornamental steel-framed stairs.


10. Section 102213 "Wire Mesh Partitions" for wire mesh security partitions and
doors.
A. Delegated Design: Design metal stairs, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and
design criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity
loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions
indicated.
1. Uniform Load: 4.79 kN/sq. m.
2. Concentrated Load: 1.33 kN applied on an area of 2580 sq. mm.
3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads
in addition to loads specified above.
5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/240 or L/360
or 6.4 mm, whichever is less.
C. Structural Performance: Generally the loading of barriers, fences and gates that
may be subject to crowd loading are to comply with the requirement of the Guide to
Safety at Sports Grounds, 5
th
Edition, 2008, section 11:
1. Horizontal imposed loads for barriers:
a. Barriers for gangways of seating decks, aligned at right angles to the
direction of spectator movement: 3.0 kN/m length.
b. Barriers for gangways of seating decks, parallel to the direction of
spectator movement: 2.0 kN/m length.
c. Barriers for seating decks, adjacent to the end row of seats and
protecting spectators from falling sideways: 1.0 kN/m length.
d. Barriers for seating decks, behind a rear row of seats and protecting
spectators from falling backwards: 1.0 kN/m length.
e. Barriers positioned within 530mm in front of seats: 1.5 kN/m length.
f. Barriers for stairways, landings and ramps, aligned at right angles to
the direction of movement of spectators: 3.0 kN/m length.
g. Barriers for stairways, landings, and ramps, aligned with the direction
of movement of spectators: 2.0 kN/m length.
h. Barriers for gangways in standing areas, aligned at right angles to the
2. Infill of Guards:
a. Concentrated load of 0.22 kN applied horizontally on an area of 0.093
sq. m.
b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
D. Seismic Performance: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. Component Importance Factor is 1.5.


A. Product Data: For metal stairs and the following:
1. Prefilled metal-pan stair treads.
2. Precast concrete treads.
3. Epoxy-resin-filled stair treads.
4. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate finishes.
5. Abrasive nosings.
6. Metal floor plate treads.
7. Paint products.
8. Grout.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to
other work.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or
design.
D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard
sizes:
1. Precast concrete treads.
2. Epoxy-resin-filled stair treads.
3. Stair treads with nonslip-aggregate surface finish.
4. Metal floor plate treads.
5. Grating treads.
6. Abrasive nosings.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
A. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer and/or testing agency.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop
primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a
qualified testing agency, for stairs and/or railings.
1. Test railings according ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
B. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum
Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual,"
for class of stair designated, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.


1. Preassembled Stairs: Commercial and/or Service class.
2. Industrial-Type Stairs: Industrial class.
3. Ornamental Stairs: Architectural class.
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the
following:
2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
1.7 COORDINATION
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete
inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in
concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
C. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they will not
encroach on required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair
enclosure.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless
otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work,
provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or
blemishes.
2.2 FERROUS METALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36M.
B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) and/or ASTM A 513.
C. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM
A 36M or ASTM A 283M, Grade C or D.
D. Abrasive-Surface Floor Plate: Steel plate with abrasive granules rolled into surface
and/or with abrasive material metallically bonded to steel.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following and/or available to contractor design, subject to Company


Representative approval that may be incorporated into the Work include, but
are not limited to, the following:
a. To be selected from the manufacturer's standard range by the Company
Representative.
E. Steel Bars for Grating Treads: ASTM A 36M or steel strip, ASTM A 1011M or
ASTM A 1018M.
F. Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510M.
G. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47M,
H. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008M, either commercial steel,
Type B, or structural steel, Grade 170, unless another grade is required by design
loads; exposed.
I. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011M, either commercial steel,
loads.
J. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653M, Z275 coating, either commercial steel,
loads.
K. Expanded-Metal, Carbon Steel: ASTM F 1267, Type I (expanded) and/or Type II
(expanded and flattened), Class 1 (uncoated).
1. Style Designation: 3/4 number 13 and/or 1-1/2 number 10 Designation to be
as confirmed by the Company Representative.
L. Perforated Metal: Cold-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 1008M, or hot-rolled steel
sheet, ASTM A 1011M, commercial steel Type B, 1.52 mm or thickness as
indicated on Drawing, with 6.4-mm holes 9.5 mm o.c. in staggered rows and/or with
3.2-by-25.4-mm round end slotted holes in staggered rows as-is-of-Design Product:
Provide product with perforations matching. Manufacturer's name; product name or
designation to contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval.
M. Perforated Metal: Galvanized-steel sheet, ASTM A 653M, Z275 coating,
commercial steel Type B, 1.63 mm or thickness as indicated on Drawing , with 6.4-
mm holes 9.5 mm o.c. in staggered rows Refer to the Design Drawings.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide product with perforations matching
Manufacturer's name, product name and designation to contractor design,
subject to Company Representative approval.
2.3 NONFERROUS METALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221M, Alloy 6063-T6.
B. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.
C. Bronze Extrusions: ASTM B 455, Alloy UNS No. C38500 (extruded architectural
bronze).


D. Bronze Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C83600 (leaded red brass) or
No. C84400 (leaded semi-red brass).
E. Nickel Silver Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C97600 (20 percent leaded
nickel bronze).
2.4 ABRASIVE NOSINGS
A. Cast-Metal Units: Cast iron and/or aluminum and/or bronze and/or nickel silver,
with an integral abrasive, as-cast finish consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon
carbide, or a combination of both. Fabricate units in lengths necessary to accurately
fit openings or conditions.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, to contractor
design, subject to Company Representative approval:
2. Configuration: Cross-hatched units, 75 mm and/or 100 mm wide without lip.
3. Configuration: Cross-hatched angle-shaped units, same depth as bar-grating
treads and 25 to 38 mm wide.
B. Extruded Units: Aluminum and/or Bronze units with abrasive filler consisting of
aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both, in an epoxy-resin binder.
Fabricate units in lengths necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, to contractor
design, subject to Company Representative approval

2. Provide ribbed units, with abrasive filler strips projecting 1.5 mm above
aluminum extrusion.
3. Provide solid-abrasive-type units without ribs.
4. Nosings: Square-back units,48 mm and/or 75 mm and/or 100 mm wide,
without lip.
5. Nosings: Two-piece units, 75 mm wide, with sub-channel for casting into
concrete.
C. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units,
as standard with manufacturer.
D. Apply bituminous paint to concealed surfaces of cast-metal units set into concrete.
E. Apply clear lacquer to concealed surfaces of extruded units set into concrete.
2.5 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633
or ASTM F 1941M, Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built
into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6;
with hex nuts, ASTM A 563M; and, where indicated, flat washers.


C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts,
ASTM A 563M; and, where indicated, flat washers.
1. Provide mechanically deposited or hot-dip, zinc-coated anchor bolts for
exterior stairs and/or stairs indicated to be galvanized and/or stairs indicated
to be shop primed with zinc-rich primer.
D. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.7M.
E. Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.3.8M.
F. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22M.
G. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.2M.
H. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors and/or chemical
anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load
imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when
installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted
by a qualified independent testing agency.
2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy
Group A1 and/or Group A4 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 738M, and nuts,
ASTM F 836M.
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for
metal alloy welded.
B. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and
C. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099113 "Exterior
Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting." and/or Section 099600 "High-
Performance Coatings." and/or Section 099113 "Exterior Painting," Section 099123
"Interior Painting," and Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."
D. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-
rich primer.
E. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, to contractor design,
subject to Company Representative Approval:


F. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-
G. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
H. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive,
I. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Section 033000
"Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with
a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 20 MPa unless otherwise indicated.
J. Nonslip-Aggregate Concrete Finish: Factory-packaged abrasive aggregate made
from fused, aluminum-oxide grits or crushed emery; rustproof and non-glazing;
unaffected by freezing, moisture, or cleaning materials.
K. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185M, 152 by 152 mm, W1.4 by W1.4, unless
2.7 PRECAST CONCRETE TREADS
A. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Section 033000
"Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, ready-mixed concrete with a minimum
28-day compressive strength of 35 MPa and a total air content of not less than 4
percent or more than 6 percent.
B. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded wire fabric, 50 by 50 mm by 1.6-
mm- diameter wire; comply with ASTM A 185M and ASTM A 82M, except for
minimum wire size.
A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings,
clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and
anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure.
1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated.
2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
3. Fabricate treads and platforms of exterior stairs so finished walking surfaces
slope to drain.
B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible.
Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly
mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges
D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain
separation or otherwise impairing work.
E. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.


F. Weld connections to comply with the following:
4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated.
5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's
"Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 welds: no evidence of a
welded joint and/or Type 2 welds: completely sanded joint, some
undercutting and pinholes okay and/or Type 3 welds: partially dressed weld
with spatter removed and/or Type 4 welds: good quality, uniform undressed
weld with minimal splatter.
G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-
head (countersunk) screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where
least conspicuous.
H. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.
Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
2.9 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS
A. Stair Framing:
1. Fabricate stringers of steel plates and/or channels and/or plates or channels
and/or tubes.
a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel and/or tube stringers.
2. Construct platforms of steel plate and/or channel and/or plate or channel
and/or tube headers and miscellaneous framing members as needed to comply
with performance requirements and/or indicated.
3. Weld or bolt stringers to headers; weld or bolt framing members to stringers
and headers. If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on
finished surfaces.
4. Where stairs are enclosed by gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies, provide
hanger rods or struts to support landings from floor construction above or
below. Locate hanger rods and struts where they will not encroach on
required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair
enclosure.
5. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting
struts designed for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry.
B. Metal-Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations
shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance
requirements but not less than 1.7 mm and/or indicated.
1. Steel Sheet: Uncoated cold and/or hot-rolled steel sheet unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Steel Sheet: Galvanized-steel sheet, where indicated.
3. Directly weld metal pans to stringers; locate welds on top of subtreads where
they will be concealed by concrete fill. Do not weld risers to stringers.


4. Attach risers and subtreads to stringers with brackets made of steel angles or
bars. Weld brackets to stringers and attach metal pans to brackets by
welding, riveting, or bolting.
5. Shape metal pans to include nosing integral with riser.
6. Attach abrasive nosings to risers.
7. At Contractor's option, provide stair assemblies with metal-pan subtreads
filled with reinforced concrete during fabrication.
8. Provide epoxy-resin-filled treads, reinforced with glass fibers, with slip-
resistant, abrasive surface.
9. Provide subplatforms of configuration indicated or, if not indicated, the same
as subtreads. Weld subplatforms to platform framing.
a. Smooth Soffit Construction: Construct subplatforms with flat metal
under surfaces to produce smooth soffits.
C. Abrasive-Coating-Finished, Formed-Metal Stairs: Form risers, treads, and
platforms to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply
with performance requirements but not less than 2.5 mm and/or indicated.
1. Steel Sheet: Uncoated hot-rolled steel sheet unless otherwise indicated.
2. Directly weld risers and treads to stringers; locate welds on underside of
stairs.
3. Provide platforms of configuration indicated or, if not indicated, the same as
treads. Weld platforms to platform framing.
4. Finish tread and platform surfaces with manufacturer's standard epoxy-
bonded abrasive finish.
D. Metal Floor Plate Stairs: Form treads and platforms to configurations shown from
rolled-steel and/or abrasive-surface floor plate of thickness needed to comply with
performance requirements, but not less than 6.4 mm and/or needed to comply with
performance requirements, but not less than 4.8 mm and/or needed to comply with
performance requirements, but not less than 3.2 mm and/or indicated.
1. Form treads with integral nosing and back edge stiffener. Form risers of
same material as treads.
2. Form treads with integral nosing and back edge stiffener. Form risers from
steel sheet not less than 2.5 mm thick, welded to tread nosings and stiffeners
and to platforms.
3. Form treads with integral nosing and back edge stiffener, and with open
risers.
4. Weld steel supporting brackets to stringers and weld treads to brackets.
5. Fabricate platforms with integral nosings matching treads and weld to
platform framing.
E. Metal Bar-Grating Stairs: Form treads and platforms to configurations shown from
metal bar grating; fabricate to comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar
Grating Manual."
1. Fabricate treads and platforms from welded and/or pressure-locked steel
grating with 32-by-5-mm bearing bars at 24 mm o.c. and/or 25-by-5-mm
bearing bars at 17 mm o.c. and/or 25-by-3-mm bearing bars at 11 mm o.c.
and crossbars at 100 mm o.c.
2. Fabricate treads and platforms from welded and/or pressure-locked steel
grating with openings in gratings no more than8 mm and/or 12 mm and/or 19
mm in least dimension.


3. Surface: Plain and/or Serrated.
4. Finish: Shop primed and/or Painted and/or Galvanized.
5. Fabricate grating treads with rolled-steel floor plate and/or cast abrasive
nosing and with steel angle or steel plate carrier at each end for stringer
connections. Secure treads to stringers with bolts.
6. Fabricate grating platforms with nosing matching that on grating treads.
Provide toe plates at open-sided edges of grating platforms. Weld grating to
platform framing.
2.10 STAIR RAILINGS
A. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 055213 "Pipe and Tube Railings
and/or Section 057300 "Decorative Metal Railings."
1. Fabricate newels of square steel tubing and provide newel caps of pressed
steel and/or gray-iron castings, as shown.
2. Rails may be bent at corners, rail returns, and wall returns, instead of using
prefabricated fittings.
3. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated.
B. Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for
design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of
tube, post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand
indicated loads.
1. Rails and Posts: 41-mm- diameter and/or 38-mm- square top and bottom rails
and 38-mm- square posts.
2. Picket Infill: 13-mm- square pickets spaced less than 100 mm clear.
3. Expanded-Metal Infill: Expanded-metal panels edged with U-shaped
channels made from steel sheet not less than 1.1 mm thick. Orient expanded
metal with long dimension of diamonds parallel to top rail and/or
perpendicular to top rail and/or vertical.
4. Perforated-Metal Infill: Perforated-metal panels edged with U-shaped
channels made from metal sheet, of same metal as perforated metal and not
less than 1.1 mm thick. Orient perforated metal with pattern parallel to top
rail and/or perpendicular to top rail and/or horizontal and/or vertical and/or as
indicated on Drawings.
5. Mesh Infill: Woven wire mesh crimped into 25-by-13-by-3-mm steel
channel frames. Orient wire mesh with diamonds vertical and/or wires
perpendicular and parallel to top rail and/or wires horizontal and vertical.
6. Intermediate Rails Infill: 41-mm- diameter and/or 38-mm- square
intermediate rails spaced less than 305 mm and/or 533 mm clear.
7. Gates: Form gates from steel tube of same size and shape as top rails, with
infill to match guards. Provide with cam-type, self-closing and/or spring
hinges for fastening to wall and overlapping stop with rubber bumper to
prevent gate from opening in direction opposite egress.
C. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope
components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this
purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
1. Finish welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards"
for Type 1 welds: no evidence of a welded joint and/or Type 2 welds:
completely sanded joint, some undercutting and pinholes okay and/or Type 3


welds: partially dressed weld with spatter removed and/or Type 4 welds:
good quality, uniform undressed weld with minimal splatter.
D. Form changes in direction of railings as follows:
1. As detailed.
2. By bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.
3. By flush bends or by inserting prefabricated flush-elbow fittings.
4. By radius bends of radius indicated or by inserting prefabricated elbow
fittings of radius indicated.
5. By inserting prefabricated elbow fittings and/or flush-elbow fittings and/or
elbow fittings of radius indicated.
E. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform
curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of
member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise
deforming exposed surfaces of components.
F. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
G. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated.
Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 6 mm or less.
H. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures,
flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for
attaching to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting
to concrete or masonry work.
1. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated.
2. For galvanized railings, provide galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners,
sleeves, and other ferrous-metal components.
3. For non-galvanized railings, provide non-galvanized ferrous-metal fittings,
brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors embedded in
exterior masonry and concrete construction.
I. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant
material, where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to
structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce
adequate bearing area to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate.
2.11 FINISHES
B. Finish metal stairs after assembly.
C. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153M
for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123M for other steel and iron
products.
paint adhesion.


2. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in finished Work, unless
indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off
smooth.
D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply
with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." and/or SSPC-SP 3,
"Power Tool Cleaning." and/or minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC
surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of
installed products:
1. Exterior Stairs: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Interior Stairs: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
3. Interior Stairs: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
E. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those
with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification
No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where
necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded
fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other
connectors.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for
installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation,
measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.
C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast
into concrete unless otherwise indicated.
D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld
connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded
because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of
exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted
or screwed field connections.
F. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General"
Article.
G. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with
Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."


1. Install abrasive nosings with anchors fully embedded in concrete. Center
nosings on tread width.
H. Install precast concrete treads with adhesive supplied by manufacturer.
3.2 INSTALLING METAL STAIRS WITH GROUTED BASEPLATES
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and
roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of baseplates.
B. Set steel stair baseplates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After stairs have been
positioned and aligned, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if
protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.
1. Use nonmetallic, non-shrink grout unless otherwise indicated.
2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids
remain.
3.3 INSTALLING RAILINGS
A. Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting
joints. Space posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design
loads. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and rail ends to building
construction as follows:
1. Anchor posts to steel by welding directly to steel supporting members.
2. Anchor handrail ends to concrete and masonry with steel round flanges
welded to rail ends and anchored with post-installed anchors and bolts.
B. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Use type of bracket with flange tapped
for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt and/or with predrilled hole for
exposed bolt anchorage. Provide bracket with 38-mm clearance from inside face of
handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated,
at spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets to building
construction as required to comply with performance requirements and/or as
follows:
1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields
and hanger or lag bolts.
2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood
backing between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing
members.
4. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into fire-retardant-
treated wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to
locate backing members.
5. For steel-framed partitions, use self-tapping screws fastened to steel framing
or to concealed steel reinforcements.
6. For steel-framed partitions, use toggle bolts installed through flanges of steel
framing or through concealed steel reinforcements.


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted
connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same
painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 0.05-mm dry film thickness.
B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted
"Interior Painting."
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
REV A

Re3isio(
A
)evision A Contra#t
REFERENCE DESIGN

SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL
RAILINGS

Job number 214607

Arup Gulf Ltd
13 Fitzroy Street
London W1T 4BQ
arup.com

SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Aluminum decorative railings with stainless-steel, wire-rope guard infill.
2. Stainless-steel decorative railings with stainless-steel, wire-rope guard infill.
3. Steel decorative railings with stainless-steel, wire-rope guard infill.
4. Glass- supported railings.
5. Post-supported railings with glass infill.

1. Type AM-602 Spectator separation barrier.
2. Type BAL-101 Structural glazed balustrade, clamp fixed.
3. Type BAL-102 Glazed balustrade and galvanized mild steel handrail, fixed
to concrete upstand.
4. Type BAL-103 Glass balustrade (Fully glazed) with recessed fixing, to royal
box areas
5. Type BAL-104 Glass balustrade (Fully glazed) with recessed fixing, to
disabled seating platform surrounds.
6. Type BAL-105 Stainless steel balustrade with laminated safety glass infill.
7. Type BAL-106 Galvanized mild steel balustrade with metal infill and
handrail.
8. Type BAL-107 Galvanised mild steel concession queuing barrier.
9. Type BAL-108 Galvanised mild steel concession queuing barrier with self
closing gate.
10. Type BAL-109 Glazed balustrade and stainless steel handrail - recessed
stainless steel floor channel.
11. Type BAL-112 Open galvanized mild steel balustrade.
12. Type BAL-114 Open galvanized mild steel balustrade.
13. Type BAL-115 Open galvanized mild steel balustrade assembly.
14. Type BAL-117 Open galvanized mild steel.
15. Type BAL-121 Galvanized mild steel handrail.


20. Type BAL-126 Stainless steel handrail.
21. Type BAL-127 Stainless steel handrail.
22. Type BAL-133 Glazed balustrade, clamped at stringer (STR-103) with
bronze anodized aluminium handrail.

1. Section 055000 Metal Fabrications.
2. Section 055100 "Metal Stairs" for steel tube railings included with metal
stairs.
3. Section 055213 "Pipe and Tube Railings" for railings fabricated from pipe
and tube components.
4. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for metal backing for
anchoring railings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Railings: Guards, handrails, and similar devices used for protection of occupants at
open-sided floor areas, pedestrian guidance and support, visual separation, or wall
protection.
A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis
by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
B. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine
allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following:
1. Aluminum: The lesser of minimum yield strength divided by 1.65 or
minimum ultimate tensile strength divided by 1.95.
2. Copper Alloys: 60 percent of minimum yield strength.
3. Stainless Steel: 60 percent of minimum yield strength.
4. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.
5. Glass: 25 percent of mean modulus of rupture (50 percent probability of
breakage), as listed in "Mechanical Properties" in AAMA's Aluminum
Curtain Wall Series No. 12, "Structural Properties of Glass."
C. Structural Performance: Generally the loading of barriers, fences and gates that
may be subject to crowd loading are to comply with the requirement of the Guide to
Safety at Sports Grounds, 5
th
Edition, 2008, section 11:
1. Horizontal imposed loads for barriers:
a. Barriers for gangways of seating decks, aligned at right angles to the
b. Barriers for gangways of seating decks, parallel to the direction of
spectator movement: 2.0 kN/m length.
c. Barriers for seating decks, adjacent to the end row of seats and
protecting spectators from falling sideways: 1.0 kN/m length.


d. Barriers for seating decks, behind a rear row of seats and protecting
spectators from falling backwards: 1.0 kN/m length.
e. Barriers positioned within 530mm in front of seats: 1.5 kN/m length.
f. Barriers for stairways, landings and ramps, aligned at right angles to
the direction of movement of spectators: 3.0 kN/m length.
g. Barriers for stairways, landings, and ramps, aligned with the direction
of movement of spectators: 2.0 kN/m length.
h. Barriers for gangways in standing areas, aligned at right angles to the
2. Infill of Guards:
a. Concentrated load of 0.22 kN applied horizontally on an area of 0.093
sq. m.
b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
3. Glass-Supported Railings: Support each section of top rail by a minimum of
three glass panels or by other means so top rail will remain in place if any one
panel fails.
D. Thermal Movements: Provide for changes in dimension resulting from changes in
temperature in any of its parts, its supporting framework and brackets without any
reduction in the performance below the minimum levels require herein. Use the
following external surface temperature ranges:

a. Heavyweight materials, light color: 0C to +60C.
b. Heavyweight materials, dark color: 0C to +80C.
c. Lightweight insulated materials, light color: 0C to +70C.
d. Lightweight insulated materials, dark color: 0C to +90C.
e. Clear glass: 0C to +70C.
f. Coated glass: 0C to +90C.
2.
E. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by
insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible
materials.
1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Contractor will engage a qualified testing agency
to perform preconstruction testing on laboratory mockups. Retesting of products
that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
1. Testing Agency to be approved by Company Representative.
2. Build laboratory mockups at testing agency facility; use personnel, materials,
and methods of construction that will be used at Project site.
3. Test railings according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
4. Notify the Company Representative. Seven days in advance of the dates and
times when laboratory mockups will be tested.


A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Manufacturer's product lines of railings assembled from standard
components.
2. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to
other work.
design, including mechanical finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.
1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including
handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters.
2. Each type of glass required.
3. Fittings and brackets.
4. Welded connections.
5. Brazed connections.
6. Assembled Samples of railing systems, made from full-size components,
including top rail, post, handrail, and infill. Show method of finishing
members at intersections. Samples need not be full height.
A. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer and/or testing agency.
B. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products certifying that
products furnished comply with requirements.
C. Welding certificates.
D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a
qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
E. Preconstruction test reports.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single
manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes
requirements for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics.
Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles
of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to


adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject
to verification by one or more methods including structural analysis, preconstruction
testing, field testing, and in-service performance.
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by the Company
Representative, except with the Company Representative's approval. If
modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to the
Company Representative for review.
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the
following:
D. Safety Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark glass with certification label of the
SGCC and/or the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass,
thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
F. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and
installation.
1. Build mockups as shown on Drawings or schedule.
2. Build mockups for each form and finish of railing consisting of two posts, top
rail, infill area, and anchorage system components that are full height and are
not less than 600 mm in length.
3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed
at time of Mechanical Completion.
G. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site or at a location as
confirmed by the Company Representative.
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction
contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.10 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete


inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in
concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not
support railings temporarily by any means that do not suit structural performance
requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, to contractor design,
subject to Company Representative approval:
1. Stainless-Steel Decorative Railings.
2. Steel Decorative Railings.
3. Glass-Supported Railings.
2.2 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam
marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails unless
1. Provide cast-metal brackets with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to
threaded hanger bolt.
2. Provide either formed- or cast-metal brackets with predrilled hole for exposed
bolt anchorage.
3. Provide formed-steel brackets with predrilled hole for bolted anchorage and
with snap-on cover that matches rail finish and conceals bracket base and bolt
head.
4. Provide extruded-aluminum brackets with interlocking pieces that conceal
anchorage. Locate set screws on bottom of bracket.
2.3 STAINLESS STEEL
A. Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 316Grade MT 316L.
B. Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP 316Grade TP 316L.
C. Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, or CF 8M.
D. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A 666, Type 316Type 316L.
E. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 316Type 316L.
F. Wire Rope and Fittings:


from one of the following manufacturers (or equal and approved by Company
Representative):
a. Cable Connection (The) or equal and approved.
b. Secosouth, Inc or equal and approved.
2. Wire Rope: 1-by-19 and/or 7-by-7 and/or 7-by-19 configuration as indicated
on drawing wire rope made from wire complying with ASTM A 492,
Type 316.
3. Wire-Rope Fittings: Connectors of types indicated, fabricated from stainless
steel, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to minimum
breaking strength of wire rope with which they are used.
G. Expanded Metal: ASTM F 1267, , Class 3 (corrosion-resisting steel), made from
stainless-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 666, Type 316.
1. Style Designation: To contractor design, subject to Company Representative
approval.
H. Perforated Metal: Stainless-steel sheet, ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666,
Type 304 and/or Type 316L, 1.59 mm with 6.4-mm holes 9.5 mm o.c. in staggered
rows.
I. Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, diamond and/or square pattern, 50-mm
woven-wire mesh, made from 3.5-mm nominal diameter wire complying with
ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304 and/or Type 316.
2.4 STEEL
A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) and/or ASTM A 513.
B. Bars: Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010.
C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
D. Expanded Metal: ASTM F 1267,Type 1.
1. Style Designation: 3/4 number 13 and/or 1-1/2 number 10 .
E. Perforated Metal: Cold-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, or hot-rolled
steel sheet, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel Type B, 1.52 mm or
thickness as indicated on Drawing with 6.4-mm holes 9.5 mm o.c. in staggered rows
.
F. Perforated Metal: Galvanized-steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 coating,
commercial steel Type B, 1.63 mm or thickness as indicated on Drawing with 6.4-
mm holes 9.5 mm o.c. in staggered rows and/or with 3.2-by-25.4-mm round end
slotted holes in staggered rows .
G. Woven-Wire Mesh: Intermediate-crimp, diamond and/or square pattern, 50-mm
woven-wire mesh, made from 3.5-mm nominal diameter wire complying with
ASTM A 510M.


2.5 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A
(uncoated), Type 1 (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3. Provide products that have
been tested for surface and edge compression according to ASTM C 1048 and for
impact strength according to 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.
1. Glass Color: Clear.
2. Thickness for Structural Glass Balusters: 19.0 mm.
3. Thickness for Structural Glass Balusters: As required by structural loads,
19.0 mm.
4. Thickness for Glass Infill Panels: 10.0 mm.
5. Thickness for Glass Infill Panels: As required by structural loads, 10.0 mm.
6. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
B. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, Condition A (uncoated), Type I (transparent flat
glass), Quality-Q3 with two plies of glass and polyvinyl butyral interlayer not less
than 1.52 mm thick.
C. Ceramic-Coated Glass: Heat-treated float glass, Condition C; with ceramic enamel
applied by silk-screened process; complying with Specification No. 95-1-31 in
GANA's "Engineering Standards Manual" and with other requirements specified.
a. Glass Color: Clear.
2. Ceramic Coating Color and Pattern: As selected from manufacturer's full
range.
D. Glazing Cement and Accessories for Structural Glazing: Glazing cement, setting
blocks, shims, and related accessories as recommended or supplied by railing
manufacturer for installing structural glazing in metal subrails.
1. Glazing Cement: Non-shrinking organic cement designed for curing by
passing an electric current through metal subrail holding glass panel, as
standard with manufacturer.
E. Glazing Gaskets for Glass Infill Panels: Glazing gaskets and related accessories
recommended or supplied by railing manufacturer for installing glass infill panels in
post-supported railings.
2.6 FASTENERS
A. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
1. Aluminum Components: Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners.
2. Stainless-Steel Components: Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners.
3. Uncoated Steel Components: Plated-steel fasteners complying with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating where
concealed; Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners where exposed.


4. Galvanized-Steel Components: Plated-steel fasteners complying with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating.
5. Dissimilar Metals: Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners.
B. Fasteners for Anchoring to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and
class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types
of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
C. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for
attaching railings to other work unless otherwise indicated and/or exposed fasteners
are unavoidable and/or exposed fasteners are the standard fastening method for
railings indicated.
1. Provide Phillips and/or tamper-resistant and/or square or hex socket flat-head
machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
D. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to
six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load
imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to
ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
E. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors and/or chemical
anchors.
2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated:
Alloy Group A1 and Group A4 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 738M, and
nuts, ASTM F 836M.
A. Electrical Components: Provide internal, fluorescent light fixtures and electrical
components, required as part of illuminated railings, that comply with NFPA 70 and
that are listed and labeled by UL.
B. Plastic Handrail Caps: Thermoplastic rail covering, color as indicated or from
manufacturer's standard colors.
C. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for
metal alloy welded.
1. For aluminum railings, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer
of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and
compatibility in fabricated items.
D. Brazing Rods: For copper-alloy railings, provide type and alloy as recommended
by producer of metal to be brazed and as required for color match, strength, and
compatibility in fabricated items.
E. Low-Emitting Paints and Coatings: Paints and coatings applied to interior
decorative metal railings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of


Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."
F. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.
G. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-
H. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099123 "Interior
Painting."
I. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-
rich primer.
J. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.
K. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Cementitious galvanized metal primer
complying with MPI#26 or Water-based galvanized metal primer complying with
MPI#134.
L. Intermediate Coats and Topcoats: Provide products that comply with
Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
M. Epoxy Intermediate Coat: Complying with MPI#77 and compatible with primer
and topcoat.
N. Polyurethane Topcoat: Complying with MPI#72 and compatible with undercoat.
O. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
P. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive,
Q. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, non-shrink, non-staining, hydraulic-
controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to
create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound.
1. Water-Resistant Product: At exterior locations provide formulation that is
resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a
sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for
exterior use.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design,
dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less
than that required to support structural loads.
B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing
and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling


limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use
connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
C. Make up wire-rope assemblies in the shop to field-measured dimensions with
fittings machine swaged. Minimize amount of turnbuckle take-up used for
dimensional adjustment so maximum amount is available for tensioning wire ropes.
Tag wire-rope assemblies and fittings to identify installation locations and
orientations for coordinated installation.
D. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges
E. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
F. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.
Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. Locate weep holes in
inconspicuous locations.
G. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and
similar items.
H. Connections: To Contractors proposal.
I. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use
fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at
fittings.
3. Remove flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's
"Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 welds: no evidence of a
welded joint.
J. Welded Connections for Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate railings to interconnect
members with concealed internal welds that eliminate surface grinding, using
manufacturer's standard system of sleeve and socket fittings.
K. Brazed Connections: Connect copper-alloy railings by brazing. Cope components
at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Braze
corners and seams continuously.
1. Use materials and methods that match color of base metal, minimize
distortion, and develop maximum strength and corrosion resistance.
2. Remove flux immediately.
3. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and brazed surface matches contours of
adjoining surfaces.
L. Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners
and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline
joints.


1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive
if this is manufacturer's standard splicing method.
M. Form changes in direction as follows:
1. By bending and/or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.
2. By flush bends and/or by inserting prefabricated flush-elbow fittings.
3. By radius bends of radius indicated and/or by inserting prefabricated elbow
fittings of radius indicated.
4. By bending to smallest radius that will not result in distortion of railing
member.
N. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required;
maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling,
twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.
O. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
P. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated.
Close ends of returns, unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 6 mm or less.
Q. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges,
miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work
1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions,
provide crush-resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall
finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and
crushing of substrate.
R. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or
masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed
by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.
S. For railing posts set in concrete, provide stainless-steel sleeves not less than 150
mm long with inside dimensions not less than 13 mm greater than outside
dimensions of post, with metal plate forming bottom closure.
T. For removable railing posts, fabricate slip-fit sockets from stainless-steel tube or
pipe whose ID is sized for a close fit with posts; limit movement of post without
lateral load, measured at top, to not more than one-fortieth of post height. Provide
socket covers designed and fabricated to resist being dislodged.
1. Provide chain with eye, snap hook, and staple across gaps formed by
removable railing sections at locations indicated. Fabricate from same metal
as railings.
U. Perforated-Metal Infill Panels: Fabricate infill panels from perforated metal made
from same metal as railings in which they are installed.
1. Edge panels with U-shaped channels made from metal sheet, of same metal
as perforated metal and not less than 1.1 mm thick.
2. Orient perforated metal with pattern parallel to top rail


V. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at
edge of open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details
indicated.
2.9 GLAZING PANEL FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate to sizes and shapes required; provide for proper edge clearance
and bite on glazing panels.
1. Clean-cut or flat-grind edges at butt-glazed sealant joints to produce square
edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces
2. Grind smooth exposed edges, including those at open joints, to produce
square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.
B. Structural Glass Balusters: Factory-bond glass to aluminum base and top-rail
channels in railing manufacturer's plant using glazing cement to comply with
manufacturer's written specifications, unless field glazing is standard with
manufacturer.
C. Structural Balusters: Provide glass panels to Contractors design for both straight
and curved sections.
D. Infill Panels: Provide glass panels to Contractors design for both straight and
curved sections.
2.10 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipment.
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not
acceptable. Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if
they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Variations in
appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
D. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and
texture, of railings.
2.11 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the
Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
B. Mechanical Finish: AA-M3x (Mechanical Finish: as specified); sand top rails,
handrails, and intermediate rails in one direction only, parallel to length of railing,
with 120- and 320-grit abrasive. After installation, polish railings with No. 0 steel
wool immersed in paste wax, then rub to a luster with a soft dry cloth.
C. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm.


D. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm.
1. Color: To match faade, subject to Company Representative approval.
E. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry
film thickness of 0.04 mm. Comply with coating manufacturer's written
instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.
1. Color and Gloss: To match faade, subject to Company Representative
approval.
F. Siliconized Polyester Finish: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-
enamel topcoat; with a dry film thickness of not less than 0.005 mm for primer and
0.02 mm for topcoat.
approval.
G. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with
AAMA 2604or AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 50or 70 percent PVDF
resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal
surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
approval.
H. High-Performance Organic Finish: Three or Four-coat fluoropolymer finish
complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 50 or 70 percent PVDF
resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply
coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'
approval.
2.12 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into
finish.
B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of
cross scratches.
1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.
C. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
D. Dull Satin Finish: No. 6.
E. Satin, Reflective, Directional Polish: No. 7.
F. Mirror-like Reflective, Non-directional Polish: No. 8.
G. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded
foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.


H. Sputter-Coated Finish: Titanium nitride coating deposited by magnetic sputter-
coating process over indicated mechanical finish.
2.13 STEEL FINISHES
A. Galvanized Railings:
1. Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel and iron railings, including hardware, after
fabrication.
2. Hot-dip galvanize indicated steel and iron railings, including hardware, after
fabrication.
3. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.
4. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.
paint adhesion.
6. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless
indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off
smooth.
B. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners,
sleeves, and other ferrous components.
C. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly
clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with
etching cleaner.
D. For non-galvanized-steel railings, provide non-galvanized ferrous-metal fittings,
brackets, fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in
exterior concrete or masonry.
E. Preparing Non-galvanized Items for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal
surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
and/or SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning." and/or requirements
indicated below:
1. Exterior Railings: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Railings Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,
"Commercial Blast Cleaning."
3. Railings Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Section 099600 "High-
Performance Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast
Cleaning."
4. Other Railings: SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning."
F. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application
painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or
masonry.
1. Shop prime uncoated railings with universal shop primer and/or primers
specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior
Painting" unless zinc-rich primer is and/or primers specified in
Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings" are indicated.
2. Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces.


G. Shop-Painted Finish: Comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting." and/or
Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."
1. Color: To match faade, to contractor design, subject to Company
H. High-Performance Coating: Apply epoxy intermediate and polyurethane topcoats to
prime-coated surfaces. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions and
with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop,
Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Apply at spreading
rates recommended by coating manufacturer.
Representative approval .
I. Powder-Coat Finish: Prepare, treat, and coat non-galvanized ferrous metal to
comply with resin manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1. Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-
SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Treat prepared metal with iron-phosphate pretreatment, rinse, and seal
surfaces.
3. Apply thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating with cured-
film thickness not less than 0.04 mm.
J. Powder-Coat Finish: Prepare, treat, and coat galvanized metal to comply with resin
manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1. Prepare galvanized metal by thoroughly removing grease, dirt, oil, flux, and
other foreign matter.
2. Treat prepared metal with zinc-phosphate pretreatment, rinse, and seal
surfaces.
3. Apply thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating with cured-
film thickness not less than 0.04 mm.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors,
to verify that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for
Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.
A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.


B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings
accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines
and levels and free of rack.
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been
coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection
by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 2 mm in 1 m.
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations
from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not
exceed 5 mm in 3 m.
C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum and copper alloys that
will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a
heavy coat of bituminous paint.
D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where
necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place
construction.
3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS
A. Non-welded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently
connecting railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to
railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using
plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings.
B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing
components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication"
Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field.
C. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart
than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve
extending 50 mm beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one
side, and locate joint within 150 mm of post.
3.4 ANCHORING POSTS
A. Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After
posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve
with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to
comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Form or core-drill holes not less than 125 mm deep and 20 mm larger than OD of
post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and
fill annular space between post and concrete with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout or
anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, welded to post after
placing anchoring material or attached to post with set screws.


D. Leave anchorage joint exposed with 3-mm buildup, sloped away from post or
anchoring material flush with adjacent surface.
E. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by
conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:
1. For aluminum railings, attach posts as indicated using fittings designed and
engineered for this purpose.
2. For copper-alloy railings, attach posts as indicated using fittings designed and
engineered for this purpose.
3. For stainless-steel railings, weld flanges to posts and bolt to metal-supporting
surfaces.
4. For steel railings, weld flanges to posts and bolt to metal-supporting surfaces.
F. Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip-fit metal sockets cast in
concrete.
3.5 ATTACHING RAILINGS
A. Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry to Contractor design.
B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces to Contractor design.
C. Attach handrails to walls with wall brackets except where end flanges are used.
Provide brackets with 38-mm clearance from inside face of handrail and finished
wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to
support structural loads.
1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded
hanger bolt or predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage.
2. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to
support structural loads.
D. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:
1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields
and hanger or lag bolts.
2. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
3. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing
between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members.
4. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into fire-retardant-
treated wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to
locate backing members.
5. For steel-framed partitions, fasten brackets directly to steel framing or
concealed steel reinforcements using self-tapping screws of size and type
required to support structural loads.
6. For steel-framed partitions, fasten brackets with toggle bolts installed through
flanges of steel framing or through concealed steel reinforcements.
3.6 INSTALLING GLASS PANELS
A. Glass-Supported Railings: Install assembly to comply with railing manufacturer's


1. Attach base channel to building structure, then insert and connect factory-
fabricated and -assembled glass panels if glass was bonded to base and top
rail channels in factory.
2. Attach base channel to building structure, then insert glass into base channel
and bond with glazing cement unless glass was bonded to base and top rail
channels in factory.
a. Support glass panels in base channel at quarter points with channel-
shaped setting blocks that also act as shims to maintain uniform space
for glazing cement. Fill remaining space in base channel with glazing
cement for uniform support of glass.
3. Adjust spacing of glass panels so gaps between panels are equal before
securing in position.
4. Erect glass railings under direct supervision of manufacturer's authorized
technical personnel.
B. Post-Supported Glass Railings: Install assembly to comply with railing
manufacturer's written instructions and with requirements in other Part 3 articles.
Erect posts and other metal railing components, then set factory-cut glass panels.
Do not cut, drill, or alter glass panels in field. Protect edges from damage.
3.7 INSTALLING PLASTIC HANDRAIL CAPS
A. Apply plastic handrail caps to top rails and handrails, where indicated, complying
with manufacturer's written instructions for cutting, mounting, forming, welding,
cleaning, applying end caps, and finishing.
B. Minimize number of joints in plastic caps by installing in lengths as long as
possible. Allow for shortening of plastic cap caused by welding and splicing
process; butt ends together to produce hairline joint.
1. Continuously weld, splice, miter, and end-cap joints using cap manufacturer's
electric welding iron designed for this purpose. Remove welding flash while
material is still soft.
2. Weld only prongs on underside of plastic cap at splice, miter, and end-cap
joints. After cutting plastic cap, dress ends with file to produce a hairline fit
between abutting sections. After mounting cap, polish top surface with cap
manufacturer's solvent designed for this purpose until joint becomes almost
invisible.
A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency
to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Extent and Testing Methodology: Testing agency will randomly select completed
railing assemblies for testing that are representative of different railing designs and
conditions in the completed Work. Railings will be tested according to
ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935 for compliance with performance requirements.


C. Remove and replace railings where test results indicate that they do not comply with
specified requirements unless they can be repaired in a manner satisfactory to the
Company Representative and will comply with specified requirements.
D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to
determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean aluminum and stainless steel by washing thoroughly with clean water and
soap, rinsing with clean water, and wiping dry.
B. Clean copper alloys according to metal finisher's written instructions in a manner
that leaves an undamaged and uniform finish matching approved Sample.
C. Clean and polish glass as recommended in writing by manufacturer. Wash both
exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date
scheduled for inspections that establish date of Mechanical Completion.
D. Clean wood rails and/or plastic handrail caps by wiping with a damp cloth and then
wiping dry.
E. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted
connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same
painted surfaces.
F. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted
G. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
3.10 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary
protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective
coverings at time of Mechanical Completion.
B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence
remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to
the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.
REV A

Re3isio(
A
)evision A Contra#t

REFERENCE DESIGN

SECTION 057500 DECORATIVE FORMED
METAL

Job number 214607

Arup Gulf Ltd
13 Fitzroy Street
London W1T 4BQ
arup.com

SECTION 057500 - DECORATIVE FORMED METAL

PART 1 - GENERAL
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY

1. Metal linings/ panels.

1. Type LIN-301 Anodized aluminum wall paneling.
2. Type LIN-303 Stainless steel skirting.
3. Type LIN-304 Aluminum panels - ceiling finish.
4. Type LIN-305 Metal panels, bonded to plywood backing, hung on supporting
metal frame. To air supply nozzles. Anodized Aluminum finish to match
external cladding Type A: Opaque External Wall.
1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for non-decorative metal fabrications.
A. Delegated Design: Design exterior decorative formed metal items, including
comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using
performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
B. Structural Performance: Decorative formed metal items, including anchors and
connections, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and
stresses without exceeding the allowable design working stress of materials
involved and without exhibiting permanent deformation in any components:
1. Wind Loads: To contractor design, subject to applicable regulatory codes
and other requirements.
2. Live Loads on Heating-Cooling Unit Enclosures: 4.8 kN/sq. m or a
concentrated load of 1.3 kN on an area of 26 sq. cm, whichever produces the
greater stress.


C. Seismic Performance: Exterior decorative formed metal items, including anchors
and connections, shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined
according to ASCE/SEI 7 .
1. Component Importance Factor is 1.0.
D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling,
opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other
detrimental effects.
1. Temperature Change: 67 deg C, ambient; 100 deg C, material surfaces.
E. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by
insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible
materials.
F. Barrier Loads: Handrails and Guards shall be in accordance with the Section 1607.7
of IBC and the following requirements sourced in the Guide to Safety in Sports
Grounds (The Green Guide) (Department for Culture, Media and Sport Crown
Copyright/ Football Licensing Authority),

1. Barriers for stairways, landings and ramps, aligned at right angles to the
direction of movement of spectators: Load = 3.0kN/m
2. Barriers for stairways, landings and ramps, aligned with the direction of
movement of spectators: Load = 2.0kN/m
3. Horizontal imposed loads will act at a height of 1100mm above the floor
level when applied as a static load at right angles to the longitudinal axis.
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include finishing materials.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for decorative formed
metal.
1. Include plans, elevations, component details, and attachments to other work.
2. Indicate materials and profiles of each decorative formed metal member,
fittings, joinery, finishes, fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items.
design, including mechanical finishes .
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on
150-mm- square Samples of metal of same thickness and material indicated for the
Work.


A. Coordination Drawings: For decorative formed metal elements that house items
specified in other Sections. Show dimensions of housed items, including locations
of housing penetrations and attachments, and necessary clearances.
B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and/or fabricator and/or organic-coating
applicator and/or anodic finisher and/or powder-coating applicator and/or
professional engineer .
C. Mill Certificates: Signed by stainless-steel manufacturers certifying that products
furnished comply with requirements.
D. Welding certificates.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For each finish to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing decorative formed metal
similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
B. Organic-Coating Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in successfully
applying organic coatings of type indicated to metals of types indicated and that
employs competent control personnel to conduct continuing, effective quality-
control program to ensure compliance with requirements.
C. Anodic Finisher Qualifications: A firm experienced in successfully applying anodic
finishes of type indicated and that employs competent control personnel to conduct
continuing, effective quality-control program to ensure compliance with
requirements.
D. Powder-Coating Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in successfully
applying powder coatings of type indicated to metals of types indicated and that
employs competent control personnel to conduct continuing, effective quality-
control program to ensure compliance with requirements.
E. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
F. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the
following:
2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."
3. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
G. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and
installation. For mockup requirements, refer to schedule.


1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed
at time of Substantial Completion.
H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at or at a location as confirmed by
the Company Representative.
A. Deliver decorative formed metal products wrapped in protective coverings and
strapped together in suitable packs or in heavy-duty cartons. Remove protective
coverings before they stain or bond to finished surfaces.
B. Store products on elevated platforms in a dry location.
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, beams, and other
construction contiguous with decorative formed metal by field measurements before
fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for decorative formed metal items. Furnish
setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including
sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be
embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for
installation.
B. Coordinate installation of decorative formed metal with adjacent construction to
ensure that wall assemblies, flashings, trim, and joint sealants, are protected against
damage from the effects of weather, age, corrosion, and other causes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INDICATIVE MANUFACTURERS
A. Type LIN-301 Aluminum Cladding:

Representative):

a. SAS International or equal and approved.
b. Lindner or equal and approved.
B. Type LIN-304 Aluminum Panels:

Representative):



a. Gooding Aluminium (Product: Perforated Aluminum Sheet, Single
Slots/ Parallel Pitch) or equal and approved
b. Lindner - Customized metal ceiling or equal and approved.
c. SAS - Customized metal ceiling or equal and approved.

2. Finish: Anodized.
3. 40% Free Area.
2.2 SHEET METAL
A. General: Provide sheet metal without pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, or other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units.
B. Aluminum Sheet: Flat sheet complying with ASTM B 209M, alloy and temper
recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish
indicated, and with not less than strength and durability properties of Alloy 5005-
H32.
C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Z275 coating, either commercial
steel or forming steel.
D. Steel Sheet: Uncoated, cold-rolled, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel,
exposed or electrolytic zinc-coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with steel sheet
substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, exposed .
E. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304 or Type 316,
stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.
A. Gaskets: As required to seal joints in decorative formed metal and remain airtight
and/or weathertight; as recommended in writing by decorative formed metal
manufacturer.
1. ASTM D 1056, Type 1, Class A, grade as recommended by gasket
manufacturer to obtain seal for application indicated.
2. Closed-cell polyurethane foam, adhesive on two sides, release paper
protected.
B. Sealants, Exterior: ASTM C 920; elastomeric silicone or polyurethane or
polysulfide sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal
joints in decorative formed metal and remain weathertight; and as recommended in
writing by decorative formed metal manufacturer.
C. Sealants, Interior: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant complying with
ASTM C 834; of type and grade required to seal joints in decorative formed metal;
and as recommended in writing by decorative formed metal manufacturer.
1. Sealants shall have a VOC content of not more than 250 g/L when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing


of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
D. Filler Metal and Electrodes: Provide type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as
recommended by producer of metal to be welded or brazed and as necessary for
strength, corrosion resistance, and compatibility in fabricated items.
1. Use filler metals that will match the color of metal being joined and will not
cause discoloration.
E. Fasteners: Fabricated from same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal unless
otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with materials joined.
1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting decorative formed metal
items and for attaching them to other work unless otherwise indicated and/or
exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method .
2. Provide Phillips and/or tamper-resistant and/or square or hex socket flat-
head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
F. Structural Anchors: For applications indicated to comply with certain design loads,
provide chemical or torque-controlled expansion anchors with capability to sustain,
without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit
masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined
by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
G. Nonstructural Anchors: For applications not indicated to comply with design loads,
provide powder-actuated fasteners and/or metal expansion sleeve anchors or
metal-impact expansion anchors of type, size, and material necessary for type of
load and installation indicated, as recommended by manufacturer, unless otherwise
indicated.
H. Anchor Materials:
2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy
Group A1 or Group A4 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 738M, and nuts,
ASTM F 836M.
I. Sound-Deadening Materials:
1. Insulation: Unfaced, mineral-fiber blanket insulation complying with
ASTM C 665, Type I, and passing ASTM E 136 test.
2. Mastic: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
J. Backing Materials: Provided or recommended by decorative formed metal
manufacturer.
K. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive recommended by metal fabricator that will fully
bond metal to metal and that will prevent telegraphing and oil canning and is
compatible with substrate and noncombustible after curing.
1. Contact Adhesive: VOC content of not more than 80 g/L when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).


2. Metal-to-Metal Adhesive: VOC content of not more than 30 g/L when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
3. Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: VOC content of not more than 70 g/L
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
4. Special-Purpose Contact Adhesive: (Contact adhesive used to bond
melamine-covered board, metal, unsupported vinyl, ultrahigh molecular
weight polyethylene, and rubber or wood veneer, 1/16 inch thick or less, to
any surface): 250 g/L.
5. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
L. Isolation Coating: To Contractor design, subject to Company Representative
approval..
1. Coating shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
2.4 PAINTS AND COATINGS
A. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and
B. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.
C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-
D. Lacquer for Copper Alloys: Clear, acrylic lacquer specially developed for coating
copper-alloy products.
E. Shop Primers: Comply with Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
F. Universal Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free,
universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with
topcoat.
rich primer.
G. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.
H. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Cementitious galvanized metal primer complying
with MPI#26 and/or Vinyl wash primer complying with MPI#80 and/or Water-
based galvanized metal primer complying with MPI#134 .
I. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.


A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble decorative formed metal items in shop to greatest
extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as
necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly
and coordinated installation.
B. Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods of decorative formed metal items
with those of adjoining construction to produce integrated assemblies with closely
fitting joints and with edges and surfaces aligned unless otherwise indicated.
C. Form metal to profiles indicated, in maximum lengths to minimize joints. Produce
flat, flush surfaces without cracking or grain separation at bends. Fold back exposed
edges of unsupported sheet metal to form a 12-mm- wide hem on the concealed
side, or ease edges to a radius of approximately 1 mm and support with concealed
stiffeners.
D. Increase metal thickness or reinforce with concealed stiffeners, backing materials,
or both, as needed to provide surface flatness equivalent to stretcher-leveled
standard of flatness and sufficient strength for indicated use.
1. Support joints with concealed stiffeners as needed to hold exposed faces of
adjoining sheets in flush alignment.
E. Build in straps, plates, and brackets as needed to support and anchor fabricated
items to adjoining construction. Reinforce decorative formed metal items as needed
to attach and support other construction.
F. Provide support framing, mounting and attachment clips, splice sleeves, fasteners,
and accessories needed to install decorative formed metal items.
G. Where welding or brazing is indicated, weld or braze joints and seams continuously.
Grind, fill, and dress to produce smooth, flush, exposed surfaces in which joints are
not visible after finishing is completed.
1. Use welding and brazing procedures that will blend with and not cause
discoloration of metal being joined.
2.6 CLOSURES AND TRIM
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following :
1. Fry Reglet Corporation or equal and approved.
2. Pittcon Industries or equal and approved.

B. Form closures and trim from metal of type and thickness indicated below. Fabricate
to fit tightly to adjoining construction, with weathertight joints at exterior
installations .
1. Aluminum Sheet: 1.60 mm or Thickness required to comply with
performance requirements.


a. Finish: Anodized, where not concealed.
2. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 1.32 mm or Thickness required to comply with
performance requirements .
a. Finish: Factory primed and/or Baked enamel and/or Siliconized
polyester and/or High-performance organic coating and/or Powder
coat .
3. Steel Sheet: 1.21 mm and/or Thickness required to comply with performance
requirements.
a. Finish: Stainless steel, where not concealed.
4. Closures and trim may be fabricated from prefinished metal sheet in lieu of
finishing after fabrication provided unfinished edges are concealed from view
and not exposed to weather.
C. Conceal fasteners where possible; otherwise, locate where they are as inconspicuous
as possible. Size fasteners to support closures and trim, with fasteners spaced to
prevent buckling or waviness in finished surfaces.
D. Drill and tap holes needed for securing closures and trim to other surfaces.
E. Incorporate gaskets where indicated or needed for concealed, continuous seal at
abutting surfaces.
F. Miter or cope trim members at corners and reinforce with bent metal splice plates to
form tight joints.
2.7 FILLER PANELS
A. Form filler panels for closing ends of partition systems and for other applications
indicated. Form from two sheets of metal of type and thickness indicated below,
separated by channels formed from the same material, producing a panel of same
thickness as partitions and/or mullions unless otherwise indicated. Incorporate
reveals, trim, and concealed anchorages for attaching to adjacent surfaces.
1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 1.63 mm or dimension as indicated on Drawing,
a. Finish: To Contractor design, subject to Company Representative
approval.
2. Steel Sheet: 1.52 mm or dimension as indicated. .
a. Finish: To Contractor design, subject to Company Representative
approval. Delete subparagraph below if not acceptable.
3. Filler panels may be fabricated from prefinished metal sheet in lieu of
finishing after fabrication provided unfinished edges are concealed from
view.
B. Fill interior of panel with sound-deadening insulation permanently attached to
inside panel faces.


C. Adhesively attach gaskets to filler panel edges where they abut mullions or glazing.
Use 25-mm- square material, unless otherwise indicated, set approximately 6 mm
into channeled edge of filler panel.
D. Attach gaskets to all edges of panels that abut adjacent surfaces to form a
continuous seal. Use compressible gaskets or mastic sealing tape, applied to center
of panel edges to be concealed from view, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Do not mechanically fasten filler panels to mullions.
2.8 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
B. Complete mechanical finishes of flat sheet metal surfaces before fabrication where
possible. After fabrication, finish all joints, bends, abrasions, and other surface
blemishes to match sheet finish.
C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
D. Apply organic and anodic finishes to formed metal after fabrication unless
E. Finish items indicated on Drawings , To Contractor design, subject to Company
F. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent
pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples.
Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance
of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved
Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the
Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
B. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, or thicker.
C. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, or thicker.
1. Color: To contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval.
D. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry
film thickness of 0.04 mm. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions
for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.
1. Color and Gloss: To contractor design, subject to Company Representative
approval.
E. Siliconized Polyester Finish: Epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel
topcoat; with a dry film thickness of not less than 0.005 mm for primer and 0.02
mm for topcoat.


approval.
F. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with
AAMA 2604 and/or AAMA 2605 and containing not less than the percent PVDF
resin by weight in color coat to meet the applicable regulatory codes and other
requirements. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to
comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
approval.
G. High-Performance Organic Finish: Three or Four -coat fluoropolymer finish
complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than the percent PVDF resin
by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat to meet the applicable regulatory
codes and other requirements. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal
approval.
2.10 GALVANIZED-STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. Preparing Galvanized Items for Factory Priming: Thoroughly clean galvanized
decorative formed metal of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat
with etching cleaner.
B. Preparing Galvanized Items for Factory Finishing: Clean surfaces with
nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and other contaminants. After
cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over
it.
C. Repairing Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
D. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is
indicated, apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of items unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application
painting.
E. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply
manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and
thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 0.025 mm for topcoat.
Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to
achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm.
approval.
F. Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply
manufacturer's standard thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating
with cured-film thickness not less than 0.04 mm. Prepare, treat, and coat metal to
comply with resin manufacturer's written instructions.


approval.
G. Siliconized-Polyester Coating: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply
manufacturer's standard epoxy primer and silicone-modified, polyester-enamel
topcoat; with a dry film thickness of not less than 0.005 mm for primer and 0.02
mm for topcoat.
approval.
H. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with
AAMA 2604 and/or AAMA 2605 and containing not less than the percent PVDF
resin by weight in color coat to meet the applicable regulatory codes and other
requirements.. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to
comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
approval.
I. High-Performance Organic Finish: Three and/or Four -coat fluoropolymer finish
complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than the percent PVDF resin
by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat to meet the applicable regulatory
codes and other requirements. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal
approval.
2.11 STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent
Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint
bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with
SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or with SSPC-SP 8,
"Pickling."
B. Pretreatment: Immediately after cleaning, apply a conversion coating of type suited
to organic coating applied over it.
C. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is
indicated, apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of items unless otherwise
indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application
painting.
D. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply
manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and
thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for
applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm.
approval.


E. Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply
manufacturer's standard thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating
with cured-film thickness not less than 0.04 mm. Prepare, treat, and coat metal to
comply with resin manufacturer's written instructions.
approval.
2.12 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into
finish.
B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of
cross scratches.
1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.
C. Bright, Cold-Rolled, Unpolished Finish: No. 2B.
D. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
E. Dull Satin Finish: No. 6.
F. Satin, Reflective, Directional Polish: No. 7.
G. Mirrorlike Reflective, Nondirectional Polish: No. 8 finish.
H. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded
foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of decorative formed metal.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place decorative formed metal items level and plumb and in alignment
with adjacent construction. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install
decorative formed metal.
1. Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field.
Return items with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed
by complete refinishing, or provide new units as required.


B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to
screws where needed to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight
connection.
C. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide
reveals and openings for sealants and joint fillers as indicated.
D. Install concealed gaskets, joint fillers, insulation, sealants, and flashings, as the
Work progresses, to make exterior decorative formed metal items weatherproof.
E. Install concealed gaskets, joint fillers, sealants, and insulation, as the Work
progresses, to make interior decorative formed metal items soundproof or lightproof
as applicable to type of fabrication indicated.
F. Corrosion Protection: Apply bituminous paint or other permanent separation
materials on concealed surfaces where metals would otherwise be in direct contact
with substrate materials that are incompatible or could result in corrosion or
deterioration of either material or finish.
G. Install decorative-formed-metal-clad doors and frames to comply with requirements
specified in Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames."
H. Apply joint treatment at joints of spackled-seam-type metal column covers. Comply
with requirements in Section 092900 "Gypsum Board."
A. Unless otherwise indicated, clean metals by washing thoroughly with clean water
and soap, rinsing with clean water, and drying with soft cloths.
B. Clean copper alloys according to metal finisher's written instructions in a manner
that leaves an undamaged and uniform finish matching approved Sample.
C. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as
used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted
surfaces.
2. Retain first paragraph below if touchup painting is specified in
Section 099123 "Interior Painting."
D. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted
E. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence
remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the
shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units.


3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of decorative formed metal items from damage during construction
period. Remove temporary protective coverings at time of Mechanical Completion.


www.arup.com

Besix
SECTION 099123
INTERIOR PAINTING
REV A | 27 January 2012

CONTRACT


Job number 218250

INTERIOR PAINTING
64

KASC-XX-A0-XX-OVE-SPC-ZZ-200064 |Contract A | 27 January
\\GLOBAL\LONDON\KASC2\4 INTERNAL DATA\06 SPECIFICATIONS\02 ARCHITECTU

Document Verification

Job title
SECTION 224223 COMMERCIAL SHOWERS Document title
SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING

Document ref
KASC-XX-
Revision Date Filename

Revision
A
27
January
2012
Description

Name
Signature

Filename
Description

Name
Signature

Filename
Description

Name
Signature

Filename
Description

Name
Signature

27 January 2012
URAL\CONTRACT ISSUE\TITLE PAGES\SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING TITLE .DOCX
fication
Job number
218250
SECTION 224223 COMMERCIAL SHOWERS
File reference

-A0-XX-OVE-SPC-ZZ-200064
SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING.docx

Contract issue. Document number revised. Notes and
clarifications page added.
Prepared by Checked by
Jan Pratt Jan Pratt




Issue Document Verification with Document

Job number
218250
File reference
docx
issue. Document number revised. Notes and
Approved by
Mark Jeffs

Approved by

Approved by

Approved by


Besix King Abdullah Sports City

KASC-XX-A0-XX-OVE-SPC-ZZ-200064|Contract A | 27 January 2012
\\GLOBAL\LONDON\KASC2\4 INTERNAL DATA\06 SPECIFICATIONS\02 ARCHITECTURAL\CONTRACT ISSUE\TITLE PAGES\SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING TITLE
.DOCX
Page 1

Notes and Clarifications

1. The document number for this specification has been amended since Reference
Design.
The number was;
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ-XX-RSP-AO-00001 SECTION 099123
INTERIOR PAINTING TITLE Reference Design
Now reads;
KASC-XX-A0-XX-OVE-SPC-ZZ-200064 SECTION 099123 INTERIOR
PAINTING Revision A Contract

2. Specification requirements are as the following pages with the following
amendments:-
a) None.
REFERENCE DESIGN


Job number 214607

Arup Gulf Ltd
13 Fitzroy Street
London W1T 4BQ
arup.com

SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
B. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the
following interior substrates:
1. Concrete.
2. Concrete masonry units (CMU).
3. Steel.
4. Cast iron.
5. Galvanized metal.
6. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).
7. Wood.
8. Gypsum board.
9. Plaster.
10. Spray-textured ceilings.
C. Related Requirements:
1. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop priming of metal
substrates with primers specified in this Section. Refer to the Drawings.
D. T-Sheet Component or Elements:
1. Type PT-101 Emulsion paint.
2. Type PT-111 Eggshell paint.
3. Type PT-121 Dust sealer (not floors).
4. Type PT-122 Dust sealer (floors).
5. Type PT-141 Epoxy floor paint.
6. Type PT-151 Masonry paint- internal.
7. Type PT-161 Metal paint.
8. Type PT-171 Anti-slip paint.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85
degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,
D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees,
E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and
application instructions.
B. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category
specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
3. VOC content.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. None in Contract.
A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish
selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
For other mockup requirements, refer to schedule.
1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the
Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Company Representative
specifically approves such deviations in writing.
2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become
part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Mechanical
Completion.
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with
ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 7 deg C.
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air
temperatures are between 10 and 35 deg C.
B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less
than 3 deg C above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from
one of the following manufacturers (or equal and approved by Company
Representative).

1. ICI.
2. Crown.
3. Sika Gulf BSC.
4. Flowcrete.
5. Watco.
6. Technical Paint Services.
7. Saudi Industrial Paint Company (SIPCO).
8. Hammerite.
9. NVP.
B. Products: subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of
the following manufacturers (or equal and approved by Company Representative):
1. Type PT-101 Emulsion:
a. ICI - Product: Vinyl Emulsion Color: RAL 9010, or equal and
approved.
b. Crown - Product: Vinyl Emulsion Color: RAL 9010, or equal and
approved.
2. Type PT-111 Eggshell:
a. ICI - Product: Eggshell Color: RAL 9010, or equal and approved.
b. Crown - Product: Eggshell Color: RAL 9010, or equal and approved.
3. Type PT-121 Dust sealer:
a. Sika Gulf BSC - Product: Sikaguard - 701, or equal and approved.
b. Technical Paint Services - Product: A144 Silicone Water Repellent, or
equal and approved.
c. Watco - Product: Safety Coat - Wallseal, or equal and approved.
4. Type PT-122 Dust sealer (floors):
a. Sika Gulf BSC - Product: Sikafloor - 2420, or equal and approved.
5. Type PT-141 Epoxy floor paint:
a. ICI Paints, or equal and approved.
b. Sherwin-Williams Co, or equal and approved.
c. Crown, or equal and approved.


6. Type PT-151 Masonry paint:
a. Sika Gulf BSC - Product: Masonry Paint Sealer, or equal and
approved.
b. Flowcrete - Product: Peran - White 050, or equal and approved.
c. Watco UK Ltd - Product: Damp Proof Paint - White, or equal and
approved.
7. Type PT-161 Metal paint:
a. Hammerite - Product: Smooth Metal Paint, or equal and approved.
b. Watco - Product: Hammercoat, or equal and approved.
c. SIPCO - or equal and approved.
8. Type PT-171 Anti-slip paint:
a. Watco - Product: Comfort Grip, Light Grey, or equal and approved.
b. ICI - Product: Glidden Anti Slip Floor Paint, Color: Grey, or equal and
approved.
c. NVP - Product: Anti Slip Floor Paint water based, Color: Grey, or
equal and approved.
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and
that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."
B. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with
one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and
application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field
experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following
VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
2. Non-flat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L.
3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L.
4. Primers, Sealers, and Under-coaters: 200 g/L.
5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L.
6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L.
7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.
8. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L.
9. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L.
10. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.
D. Low-Emitting Materials: Interior paints and coatings shall comply with the testing
and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services'
"Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."


E. Colors: As selected from manufacturer's full range or Match samples or as
indicated in a color schedule, as confirmed by the Company Representative.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following
procedure:
1. Contractor shall engage the services of a qualified testing agency to the
approval of the Company Representative to sample paint materials.
Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are
taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples
may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified
by testing agency.
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
3. Contractor shall stop applying coatings if test results show materials being
used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove non-
complying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint
surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor shall be required to
remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting
with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic
moisture meter as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
3. Wood: 15 percent.
4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
5. Plaster: 12 percent.
C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
D. Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured.
E. Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates: Verify that surfaces are dry.
F. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with
existing finishes and primers.
G. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.


3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI
Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are
removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible
because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface
preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades
involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied
protection if any.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt,
oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers
or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and
chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be
painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if
moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceed that permitted in
manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean
using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the
following:
1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."
2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning."
4. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal."
G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop
priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet
metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly
etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
I. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.
J. Wood Substrates:
1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or
plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.


K. Cotton or Canvas Insulation Covering Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other
foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to
recommendations in "MPI Manual."
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar
exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently
fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and
similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are
factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if
multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of
topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each
separate coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until
cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps,
brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections.
Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.
E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and
Electronic Safety and Security Work:
1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:
a. Equipment, including panel-boards and switch gear.
b. Un-insulated metal piping.
c. Un-insulated plastic piping.
d. Pipe hangers and supports.
e. Metal conduit.
f. Plastic conduit.
g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
h. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas
insulation covering or other paintable jacket material.
i. Mechanical items to be painted, refer to the Drawings or as confirmed
by the Company Representative.
2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:
a. Equipment, including panel-boards.
b. Un-insulated metal piping.
c. Un-insulated plastic piping.
d. Pipe hangers and supports.


e. Metal conduit.
f. Plastic conduit.
g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas
insulation covering or other paintable jacket material.
h. Mechanical items to be painted, refer to the Drawings.
3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air
inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.
A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Contractor will engage the services of a qualified
testing and inspecting agency to the approval of the Company Representative to
inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.
2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply
with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for
testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that
complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded
materials from Project site.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered
paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent
finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage
to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as
approved by Company Representative, and leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore
damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Substrates, Non-traffic Surfaces:
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50.
b. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1), MPI #53.
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #44.
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #52.
g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 4), MPI #43.
h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54.


i. Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss, (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss
of 65 units at 60 degrees), MPI #114.
2. Latex over Latex Aggregate System:
a. Prime Coat: Textured coating, latex, flat, MPI #42.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1), MPI #53.
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #44.
g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54.
h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss, (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss
3. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low
odor/VOC, MPI #149.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC,
matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (Gloss
Level 1), MPI #143.
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss
Level 2), MPI #144.
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss
Level 3), MPI #145.
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss
(Gloss Level 5), MPI #147.
4. High-Performance Architectural Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based, MPI #3.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural,
matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss
Level 2), MPI #138.
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss
Level 3), MPI #139.
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss
Level 4), MPI #140.
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss
5. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System:
b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based,
matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based (Gloss
Level 3), MPI #151.
d. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, semi-gloss
e. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, gloss (Gloss
Level 6), MPI #154.


6. Alkyd System:
b. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, interior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #49.
d. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #51.
e. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #47.
f. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #48.
B. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces:
1. Latex Floor Enamel System:
a. Prime Coat: Floor paint, latex, low gloss (maximum Gloss
Level 3), MPI #60.
b. Intermediate Coat: Floor paint, latex, low gloss (maximum Gloss
Level 3), MPI #60.
c. Topcoat: Floor paint, latex, low gloss (maximum Gloss
Level 3), MPI #60.
2. Alkyd Floor Enamel System:
a. Prime Coat: Floor enamel, alkyd, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #27.
b. Intermediate Coat: Floor enamel, alkyd, gloss (Gloss
Level 6), MPI #27.
c. Topcoat: Floor enamel, alkyd, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #27.
3. Concrete Stain System:
a. First Coat: Stain, interior, for concrete floors, MPI #58.
b. Topcoat: Stain, interior, for concrete floors, MPI #58.
4. Water-Based Clear Sealer System:
a. First Coat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, MPI #99.
b. Topcoat: Sealer, water based, for concrete floors, MPI #99.
5. Solvent-Based Clear Sealer System:
a. First Coat: Sealer, solvent based, for concrete floors, MPI #104.
b. Topcoat: Sealer, solvent based, for concrete floors, MPI #104.
C. CMU Substrates:
1. Latex System:
a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4.


matching topcoat.
Level 1), MPI #143.
Level 2), MPI #144.
Level 3), MPI #145.
matching topcoat.
Level 2), MPI #138.
Level 3), MPI #139.
Level 4), MPI #140.
matching topcoat.
Level 3), MPI #151.
Level 6), MPI #154.
5. Alkyd System:
b. Sealer Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50.
c. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, interior, matching topcoat.
d. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #49.
e. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #51.
f. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #47.
g. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #48.
D. Steel Substrates:
1. Latex over Alkyd Primer System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive, for metal, MPI #79.


b. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal, MPI #76.
c. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive, for metal, MPI #79 or
primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal, MPI #76.
d. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section 051200 "Structural Steel
Framing" where substrate is specified.
e. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1), MPI #53.
h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #52.
i. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 4), MPI #43.
j. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54.
k. Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss, (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss
2. Water-Based Dry-Fall System:
e. Topcoat: Dry fall, latex, flat, MPI #118.
f. Topcoat: Dry fall, water based, for galvanized steel, flat (Gloss
Level 1), MPI #133.
a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust-inhibitive, water based MPI #107.
matching topcoat.
Level 1), MPI #143.
Level 2), MPI #144.
Level 3), MPI #145.
e. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural,
matching topcoat.
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss
Level 2), MPI #138.
g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss
Level 3), MPI #139.


h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss
Level 4), MPI #140.
i. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss
a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust-inhibitive, water based MPI #107.
matching topcoat.
Level 3), MPI #151.
Level 6), MPI #154.
6. Alkyd System:
e. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, interior, matching topcoat.
f. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #49.
g. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #51.
h. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #47.
i. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #48.
7. Quick-Drying Enamel System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal, MPI #76.
b. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, quick dry, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Alkyd, quick dry, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #81.
d. Topcoat: Alkyd, quick dry, gloss (Gloss Level 7), MPI #96.
8. Alkyd Dry-Fall System:
e. Topcoat: Dry fall, alkyd, flat, MPI #55.
9. Aluminum Paint System:


e. Intermediate Coat: Aluminum paint, MPI #1.
f. Topcoat: Aluminum paint, MPI #1.
E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1. Latex over Waterborne Primer System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134.
2. Water-Based Dry-Fall System:
a. Prime Coat: Dry fall, water based, for galvanized steel, flat (Gloss
Level 1), MPI #133.
b. Topcoat: Dry fall, water based, for galvanized steel, flat (Gloss
Level 1), MPI #133.
matching topcoat.
Level 1), MPI #143.
Level 2), MPI #144.
Level 3), MPI #145.
matching topcoat.
Level 2), MPI #138.
Level 3), MPI #139.
Level 4), MPI #140.
5. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating Over Waterborne Primer System:


matching topcoat.
Level 3), MPI #151.
Level 6), MPI #154.
a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized metal, as recommended in writing by
topcoat manufacturer for use on galvanized-metal substrates with
topcoat indicated.
b. Intermediate Coat: Aluminum paint, MPI #1.
c. Topcoat: Aluminum paint, MPI #1.
F. Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates:
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum, MPI #95.
matching topcoat.
Level 1), MPI #143.
Level 2), MPI #144.
Level 3), MPI #145.
matching topcoat.
Level 2), MPI #138.
Level 3), MPI #139.


Level 4), MPI #140.
matching topcoat.
Level 3), MPI #151.
Level 6), MPI #154.
5. Alkyd System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, vinyl wash, MPI #80.
b. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum, MPI #95.
a. Prime Coat: Primer, vinyl wash, MPI #80.
G. Wood Substrates: Including wood trim, architectural woodwork, doors, windows,
wood-based panel products, as indicated on the Drawings or as confirmed by the
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39.
a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, alkyd, interior, MPI #45.


matching topcoat.
Level 1), MPI #143.
Level 2), MPI #144.
Level 3), MPI #145.
matching topcoat.
Level 2), MPI #138.
Level 3), MPI #139.
Level 4), MPI #140.
5. Alkyd System:
H. Wood Substrates, Traffic Surfaces:
1. Latex Floor Paint System:
b. Intermediate Coat: Floor paint, latex, low gloss (maximum Gloss
Level 3), MPI #60.
c. Topcoat: Floor paint, latex, low gloss (maximum Gloss
Level 3), MPI #60.
2. Alkyd Floor Enamel System:


a. Prime Coat: Floor enamel, alkyd, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #27.
b. Intermediate Coat: Floor enamel, alkyd, gloss (Gloss
Level 6), MPI #27.
c. Topcoat: Floor enamel, alkyd, gloss (Gloss Level 6), MPI #27.
I. Fiberglass and Plastic Substrates:
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, water based, MPI #17.
b. Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, solvent based, MPI #69.
c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC,
matching topcoat.
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (Gloss
Level 1), MPI #143.
Level 2), MPI #144.
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, (Gloss
Level 3), MPI #145.
g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss
c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural,
matching topcoat.
Level 2), MPI #138.
Level 3), MPI #139.
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss
Level 4), MPI #140.
g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss


c. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, and
matching topcoat.
d. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based (Gloss
Level 3), MPI #151.
e. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, semi-gloss
f. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, gloss (Gloss
Level 6), MPI #154.
5. Alkyd System:
J. Gypsum Board and/or Plaster Substrates:
1. Latex System:
b. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low
odor/VOC, MPI #149.
matching topcoat.
Level 1), MPI #143.
Level 2), MPI #144.
Level 3), MPI #145.
matching topcoat.


Level 2), MPI #138.
Level 3), MPI #139.
Level 4), MPI #140.
matching topcoat.
Level 3), MPI #151.
Level 6), MPI #154.
5. Alkyd over Latex Primer System:
K. Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates:
1. Latex (Flat) System: Spray applied.
a. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1), MPI #53.
b. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1), MPI #53.
2. Latex System: Spray applied.
a. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
b. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1), MPI #53.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 2), MPI #44.


f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54.
g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss, (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss
4. Alkyd (Flat) System:
a. Prime Coat: Alkyd, interior, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #49.
b. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #49.
5. Alkyd System:
L. Cotton or Canvas and ASJ Insulation-Covering Substrates: Including pipe and duct
coverings. Refer to the Drawings.
1. Latex System:
matching topcoat.
Level 1), MPI #143.
Level 2), MPI #144.
Level 3), MPI #145.
3. Alkyd over Latex Primer System:




www.arup.com

Besix
SECTION 099646
INTUMESCENT PAINTING
REV A | 27 January 2012

CONTRACT


Job number 218250

INTUMESCENT PAINTING
65

KASC-XX-A0-XX-OVE-SPC-ZZ-200065 |Contract A | 27 January
\\GLOBAL\LONDON\KASC2\4 INTERNAL DATA\06 SPECIFICATIONS\02 ARCHITECTU


Job title
SECTION 224223 COMMERCIAL SHOWERS Document title
SECTION 099646 INTUMESCENT PAINTING

Document ref
KASC-XX-
Revision Date Filename

Revision
A
27
January
2012
Description

Name
Signature

Filename
Description

Name
Signature

Filename
Description

Name
Signature

Filename
Description

Name
Signature

27 January 2012
URAL\CONTRACT ISSUE\TITLE PAGES\SECTION 099646 INTUMESCENT PAINTING TITLE .DOCX
Job number
218250
SECTION 224223 COMMERCIAL SHOWERS
File reference

-A0-XX-OVE-SPC-ZZ-200065

Contract issue. Document number revised. Notes and
clarifications page added.
Jan Pratt Jan Pratt





Job number
218250
File reference
SECTION 099646 INTUMESCENT PAINTING.docx
issue. Document number revised. Notes and
Approved by
Mark Jeffs

Approved by

Approved by

Approved by

Verification with Document

Besix King Abdullah Sports City

KASC-XX-A0-XX-OVE-SPC-ZZ-200065|Contract A | 27 January 2012
\\GLOBAL\LONDON\KASC2\4 INTERNAL DATA\06 SPECIFICATIONS\02 ARCHITECTURAL\CONTRACT ISSUE\TITLE PAGES\SECTION 099646 INTUMESCENT PAINTING TITLE
.DOCX
Page 1

Notes and Clarifications

1. The document number for this specification has been amended since Reference
Design.
The number was;
WER5, KA101-OVE-05_ZZZ-XX-RSP-AO-00001 SECTION 099646
INTUMESCENT PAINTING Reference Design
Now reads;
KASC-XX-A0-XX-OVE-SPC-ZZ- 200065 SECTION 099646
INTUMESCENT PAINTING Revision A Contract

2. Specification requirements are as the following pages with the following
amendments:-
a) None.
REFERENCE DESIGN



SECTION 099646 - INTUMESCENT PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
B. Section includes surface preparation and application of fire-retardant intumescent
paint to interior and exterior items and surfaces. Fire retardant intumescent paint
shall be of two broad types, architectural grade paint for exposed areas and
performance only based applications for plant spaces and concealed steelwork.
C. Related Sections:
1. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for primers, finish coats, and wood stains
that may be used with intumescent paint finishes.
D. T-Sheet Component or Elements:
1. Type FP-201 Intumescent paint.
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1. Product List: Cross-reference to coating system and locations of application
areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
Include manufacturer's recommended spreading rate for each separate coat
for each type of substrate indicated.
2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category
specified in Part 2 that specifies coatings approved by MPI, with the
proposed product highlighted.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each intumescent paint finish indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and each color and gloss
of intumescent paint finish indicated.
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, not less than 200 mm square.
2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
Arup Gulf Ltd
13 Fitzroy Street
London W1T 4BQ
arup.com
Job number 214607


3. Label each coat of each Sample.
4. Label each Sample for location and application area.
A. Material Test Reports: For each intumescent paint.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. None in Contract.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each paint system from single source from single
manufacturer or provide a system approved in writing by intumescent paint
manufacturer.
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products
according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with
appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: To meet regulatory codes and other requirements and
to contractor design, subject to Company Representative approval.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less .
C. MPI Standards: Comply with indicated requirements for the following:
1. Products: MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products
List."
2. Preparation and Workmanship: "MPI Architectural Painting Specification
Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.
D. Mockups: Apply benchmark Samples of paint system indicated and of each color
and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals
and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and
execution. For mockup requirements, refer to schedule.
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site as confirmed by the
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with
ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 7 deg C.
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply waterborne intumescent paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be
painted and ambient air temperatures are between 10 and 32 deg C.
B. Apply solvent-thinned intumescent paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be
painted and ambient air temperatures are between 7 and 35 deg C.
C. Do not apply intumescent paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity
exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 3 deg C above the dew point; or to
damp or wet surfaces.
D. Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and to attain temperature and conditions
specified before starting or continuing coating operation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INTUMESCENT PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with
one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and
application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field
experience.
2. For each material or coat, provide products and spreading rates recommended
in writing by intumescent paint manufacturer for use on substrate indicated.
Comply with requirements for fire-retardant coating classification and
surface-burning characteristics indicated.
B. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following
VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L.
3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC not more than 200 g/L.
4. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L.
5. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L.
6. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L.
7. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.
C. Low-Emitting Materials: Interior paints and coatings shall comply with the testing
and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services'
"Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
D. Colors and Gloss: To contractor design, subject to Company Representative
approval..


2.2 EXTERIOR, PIGMENTED, INTUMESCENT PAINT SYSTEM
A. Primer: Intumescent paint manufacturer's recommended primer, if required,
compatible with substrate and other materials indicated.
1. VOC Content: To contractor design, subject to applicable regulatory codes
B. Fire-Retardant Intumescent Paint and Overcoat: Fire-retardant paint for exterior
wood surfaces and fire-inert, weather-resistant, protective overcoat that will not
affect fire-retardant class of intumescent coating.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, or available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Flame Control Coatings, LLC; No. 149; flat finish and No. 400;
semigloss finish.
b. Magna Coatings Technology Inc.; SafeCoat Exterior Intumescent and
SafeCoat 725 Sealer/Overcoat; satin, semigloss or gloss finish.
c. Thermoguard; Thermocoat.
2.3 INTERIOR, PIGMENTED, INTUMESCENT PAINT SYSTEM
A. Primer: Intumescent paint manufacturer's recommended primer compatible with
substrate and other materials indicated.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from
Representative.
a. or Fire Research Laboratories/Ocean Fire Retardants Inc.; latex primer
approved by manufacturer.
b. PPG Industries, Inc.; Speed Hide 6-6 interior quick-drying enamel
undercoater.
B. Fire-Retardant Intumescent Paint: Solvent-based, modified-alkyd-type, fire-
retardant paint for interior wood and other combustible surfaces.
following:
a. Flame Control Coatings, LLC; No. 10-10 or No. 10-10A; flat finish.
b. Albi Manufacturing; a division of StanChem, Inc.; Albi-Cote 107A;
flat finish.


d. To be selected from the manufacturer's standard range by the Company
Representative to conform to the performance requirements and the
design intent of the drawings.
2. VOC Content: E Range of E1, E2 or E3.
C. Fire-Retardant Intumescent Paint: Water-based, latex-type, fire-retardant paint for
interior wood and other combustible surfaces.
following:
a.
b. Flame Control Coatings, LLC; No. 320A.
c. International Fire Resistant Systems, Inc.; Firefree88; flat finish.
d. Thermoguard.
3. VOC Content: To contractor design, subject to Company Representative
approvalAs confirmed by the Company Representative...
D. Topcoat/Overcoat: Solvent-based, alkyd-type, pigmented, fire-inert, protective-
finish coating that will not affect fire-retardant class of intumescent coating.
following:
a. Flame Control Coatings, LLC; No. 30-30; semigloss finish or
No. 666A; semigloss finish.
b. International Fire Resistant Systems, Inc.; coating approved by
International Fire Resistant Systems.
c. Thermoguard.
2. VOC Content: To contractor design, subject to Company Representative
approval.
E. Topcoat/Overcoat: Water-based, latex-type, pigmented, fire-inert, protective-finish
coating that will not affect fire-retardant class of intumescent coating.
Representative.
a. Flame Control Coatings, LLC; no coating required No. 40-40; low
gloss finish.
b. Albi Manufacturing; a division of StanChem, Inc.; no coating required
Albi-Cote TC Latex Semi Gloss.
c. Thermoguard.


2.4 INTERIOR, CLEAR, INTUMESCENT PAINT SYSTEM
A. Stain Coat: Factory-formulated, nonbleeding, solvent-based, alkyd-type penetrating
wood stain.
1. Stain approved by intumescent paint manufacturer.
B. Clear Sanding Sealer: Solvent-based, modified-alkyd type for interior wood
surfaces.
Representative.
a. Flame Control Coatings, LLC; No. 6 Clear Wood Sealer.
b. Fire Research Laboratories/Ocean Fire Retardants Inc.; sealer
approved by Fire Research Laboratories.
c. Thermoguard.
and other requirements..
C. Fire-Retardant Intumescent Paint: Solvent- or water-based, fire-retardant paint for
interior wood and other combustible surfaces.
Representative.
a. Flame Control Coatings, LLC; No. 166; satin finish.
b. Fire Research Laboratories/Ocean Fire Retardants Inc.; ClearCoat II;
flat or satin finish.
c. Thermoguard.
D. Topcoat/Overcoat: Protective fire-inert clear coating that will not affect fire-test-
response characteristics of intumescent coating.
Representative.
a. Flame Control Coatings, LLC; No. 167; low gloss, semigloss] or gloss
finish.
b. Fire Research Laboratories/Ocean Fire Retardants Inc.; TopCoat A;
flat, satin, semigloss or gloss finish.
c. Thermoguard.


PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
manufacturer's requirements for surface treatments, shop-primed surfaces,
maximum moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work.
B. Begin coating only when moisture content of wood substrate is 15 percent or less
when measured with an electronic moisture meter.
C. Begin coating no sooner than 28 days, or as confirmed by the Company
Representative, after substrate is constructed and is visually dry on both sides.
D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions, and compatibility with
existing finishes and primers.
E. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
and surfaces are dry.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in the "MPI
Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and coating
systems indicated.
B. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, light
fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be coated. If removal is
impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied
protection before surface preparation and coating.
1. After completing coating operations, use workers skilled in the trades
involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied
protection if any.
C. Clean substrates of substances, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints
and encapsulants, that could impair bond of coatings. Do not coat surfaces if
surface moisture content or alkalinity exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's
1. Remove incompatible primers, and reprime substrate with compatible
primers as required to produce coating systems indicated.
2. Perform cleaning and coating application so dust and other contaminants
from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply intumescent paints according to manufacturer's written instructions
and to comply with requirements for fire-retardant coating classification.
1. Use equipment and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material
being applied.


2. Coat surfaces behind movable items the same as similar exposed surfaces.
3. Apply each coat separately according to manufacturer's written instructions.
4. Finish doors on faces with intumescent finish. Paint tops, bottoms, and side
edges with fire-inert finish.
B. Apply coatings to prepared surfaces as soon as practical after preparation and before
subsequent surface soiling or deterioration.
C. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, laps, brush
marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in
sharp lines and color breaks.
1. Pigmented Finishes: If undercoats or other conditions show through
pigmented topcoat/overcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a
uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
2. Clear Finishes: Produce a smooth surface film of even sheen using multiple
coats.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded
materials from Project site.
B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered
coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage
adjacent finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating application. Correct
damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as
approved by Company Representative, and leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities, touch up and restore damaged or defaced
coated surfaces.
3.5 PAINT SYSTEM SCHEDULE
A. Prime Coat: If required and approved by intumescent paint manufacturer.
B. Fire-Retardant Intumescent Coating: Minimum two coats to comply with
requirements for fire-retardant coating classification and surface-burning
characteristics indicated.
C. Topcoat/Overcoat: Apply if required or recommended and approved by
intumescent paint manufacturer.

02 Specifications

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

02 Specifications

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aramco Overseas Company

King Abdullah Sports City

You might also like